close

Вход

Log in using OpenID

embedDownload
R
.
.
.
J
To set the C.
SET'will appear. - - .
SEEK button unt
-
.
.
...
a The 1998 Chevrolet Venture Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly.
alsoIt explains the “SIR’ system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3-1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4- 1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and tohow
drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects”on page 8- 10.
7-1
8-1
9- 1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subjectin this manual.You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
7- I
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name VENTURE are registered trademarksof
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it
was printed.We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division wheneverit appears in this manual.
We support voluntary
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Please keep this manual in your vehicle,
so it will be
Aux propribtaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en fraqais chez
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual insoitthe new
votre concessionaireou au:
owner can use it.
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, OntarioL5T lB9
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 10285629 B First Edition
‘Copyright General Motors Corporation 1997
All Rights Reserved
The dynamic William C. “Billy”
Durant shifted gears from making
carriages to making cars,
forming half the team that gave
birth to Chevrolet.
I
Louis Chevrolet, the other half of the team,
at the wheel of his experimental “Classic
Six, which enteredproduction in 1912.
That year 2999 vehicles were produced.
”
t----iii
I
In 1932 Chevrolet
introduced the
Synchro-Mesh
transmission and
ofSered a host of
accessories -- including
such niceties as a clock!
The legacy of America's favorite sportscar
began in 1953, when 319 hand-assembled
white Corvettes
launched
the
first use of a
fiberglass body in
a production car
;
:
I
:
I
I
- - - - - - - - - - - - I
iv
I
The 1957 Chevy started a romance with the American
public -- and was powered by an available fuel-injected V8.
I
I
60’sautomotive excitement
included Chevrolet landmarks
like the Corvette Sting Ray,
the sporty Camaro, and
powerplants like the
legendary 327 V8.
I
Your new Chevrolet continues a tradition of quality and value.
V
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s
manual from beginning
to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If you
do this, it will helpyou learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Index
A good place to look
for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’san alphabetical list of what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a numberof safety cautionsin this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you
if you wereto ignore
the warning.
vi
I
These mean there is something thatcould hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area,we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what todo to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you don’t, you or
Ithers could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book.This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean thereis something that could
damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell youabout something that
can damage your vehicle. Many times, thisdamage
would not be covered by your warranty, and
it could
be costly. But the notice will
tell you whatto do to help
avoid thedamage.
When you read other manuals,
you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
You’ll alsosee warning labels on your vehicle.
They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
vii
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
A
Q
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
These symbols
have todo with
your lamps:
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
COOLANT
TEMP
e
CAUSTIC
BAllERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
COOLANT
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BA'ITERY
viii
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
POWER
WlNDOW
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
,\I/,
FOG LAMPS
&0
VENTILATING
FAN
I-1
FUSE
LIGHTER
m
(0) b
HORN
BRAKE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
--
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
a cr
e,
SPEAKER
FUEL
(@)
B
a Section 1
Seats r--Id RestraintSystems
m
Here you’ll find information about the
seats in your Chevrolet andhow to use your safety belts properly.
You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safetybelts.
1-2
1-6
1-35
1-40
1-41
1-41
1-49
1-50
1-50
1-58
Seats and Seat Controls
Rear Seats
Safety Belts: They’refor Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag Systems
Rear Seat Passengers
1-62
1-64
1-66
1-68
1-7 1
1-82
1-98
1-101
1-101
1-102
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
for Children
and Small Adults
Center Passenger Position (Bench Seat)
Center Passenger Position (Bucket
Seat)
Children
Built-in Child Restraint (Option)
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing RestraintSystem Parts
After a Crash
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, take them out, put them back in and fold and
unfold them.
Driver’s 4-Way Manual Seat
To raise the seat, pullup on the leveron the front right
side of the seat.To lower the seat,push the lever down.
I
Use the lever on the front leftside of the seat to adjust the
seat forwardor backward. Pull up the leveron the front of
the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where
you want it.
To make sure the seatis locked into place, release the
lever and try to move the seatwith your body.
1-2
You can lose controlof the vehicleif you tryto
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you
don’t wantto. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Driver’s 6-Way Power Seat (Option)
A
6
C
Folding Driver’s Seatback
The seatback on the driver’s
seat foldsforward to put
items behindthe seat. Lift
the lever andfold the
seatback forward. The
seatback willlock into place
when you pushit back to
the upright position.
To adjust the driver’ssix-way power seat:
Front Control(A): Raise the front of the seat by
holding the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower
the front of the seat.
Center Control(B): Move the seatforward or rearward
by holding the control tothe front or rear.Raise or lower
the seat byholding the control upor down.
Rear Control (C): Raise therear of the seat byholding
the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the rearof
the seat.
1-3
Manual Front Passenger Seats
To use, pullup the lever on
the frontof the seatto
unlock it.
Slide the seat to where you want To
it. make sure the
seat is locked into place, release the lever and try to
move the seat with your body.
1-4
Reclining Front Seatbacks
All front seats recline.
To adjust the seatback,
rotate this knob. Itis easier
to recline the seatif you
lean forward, taking your
weight off the seatback.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting ina reclined position when your vehicle is
in motioncan be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t
do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its
job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you couldgo into it,
receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap belt can’t doits job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces wouldbe there, notat your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, havethe seatback upright. Then
sit well backin the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
1-5
Manual Lumbar Control
Turn the knob on the
inboard sideof the
seat to adjust the lower
back support.
the levers and straps,in the correct order,you can easily
remove the seatsfrom your vehicle.
When you replace the seatsin the vehicle, be sure to
follow the labelon the back of the seat for proper location.
Follow this diagram when the textin this manual tells you
what sets of floor cups to usefor each seat.
00
B
A
H
F
D
Head Restraints
Head restraints are fixed on some models
and adjustable
on others. Slide an adjustable head restraintup or down
so that the topof the restraintis closest to the topof
your ears. This position reduces the chance
of a neck
injury ina crash.
0
Rear Seats
FI
Seat Controls
The rear seats in your vehicle have levers and straps
used to adjust, removeand replace the seats.By using
1-6
G
I
1
I
J
B
U
Floor Seat Pin Diagram
Second Row Safety Belt Stowage
Dump and Stow Feature
If your vehicle has seats in the third row, there is a
sleeve on the second row outside safety beltto store the
safety beltwhile entering and exitingthe third row seats.
The rear seats inyour vehicle can be folded forward.
Use this feature for exiting and entering third row seats.
If your vehicle hasbucket seats in the second row,
follow this procedure:
To store the safety belt, pullthe belt out and slide the
moveable sleeve along the belt untilit reaches the
patch of Velcro@ onthe roof.
Simply press the sleeve against the Velcro patch to
secure it in place.
Do not have thesecond row outside safety belt stored
if
someone is sitting in thesecond row outside position.
To release the second row outside safety belt, pull the
sleeve awayfrom the Velcro patch anduse the safety
belt as usual. The sleeve should slide freely when not
in use.
There isalso a clip on the safety belt used to secure the
belt after it is disconnected from the mini-buckle. When
removing the second row bench seat, secure the loose end
of the safety beltin this clip.This will keep the safety belt
fi-om dangling and possibly striking something.
Push adjustable head restraints fullydown. Fold the
seatback flat on the seat.If the seat adjusts, slide itall the
way back. Release the rear set of hooks from the floor
pins; hang on to the straps as the seat folds forward.
I
I
I
I
I
Solid Bench Seat
If you have a solid bench seat, the seatback
can be
folded down.The seat can also be folded
forward or
removed to provide extra storage space.
1-7
Second Row Solid Bench Seats
Folding the Seatback
To fold down the seatback,
pull the nylonstrap on the
back of the seat.
To raise the seatback, pull the nylon strap
on the backof
the seat while raising the seatback until
it locks upright.
Push and pullon the seatback to check that
it is locked.
Removing the Second Row Solid Bench Seat
With the seatbackin the upright position, unhookthe
side attachmentfor the safety belt.This mini-buckle is
located on the right sideof the seat.
Push up the red center on
the buckle witha small
pointed object likea key
or pen.
1. Pull the nylon strapon the back of the seat to fold
the seatback forward.
2. From behind the bench seat, pull the nylon strap at
the base of the seat torelease the rear latchesfrom
the floor pins.
4. Unhook the front latches by rolling up the gray
handle under the seat untilthe handle locks.
3. Do not let go of the straps until the seat is folded all
the way forward.
1-9
5. Remove the seat by
rocking it slightly at the
top towards the rear
of
the vehicle and thenlift
at the front latch release
lever. This should be
done in one motion.
Replacing the SecondRow Solid BenchSeat
in so it faces rearward because
Don’t put the bench seat
it won’t latch that way.
The solid benches have seat position labels, located on
the backof the seat, showing where the seat must
go.
Follow that diagram. Use the
A, C and E sets of floor
cups. See “Seat Controls”in the beginningof this
in the
section for more details. The seat must be placed
proper locationfor the legs to attach correctly.
1
1-10
I 1. Place the front hooks of
the bench seat onto the
front two floor pins.
To
do this, the seat will
need to be angledso that
the front hooks clear the
floor pins.
2. With the seatstill folded forward,roll down the gray
handle underneath the seat to lock the front latches.
t
3. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear
legs will not attach to the rear
set of floor pins.
4. Firmly push the rear hooks into the rear floor pins by
pushing down on the rearof the seat.
5 . Try to raise the bench seat tocheck that it is
locked down.
1-11
..
__
/1\ CAUTION:
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly
can
move around in a collisionor sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock
the seat into place properly when installing
it.
6. Pull the nylon strap on the back
of the seat and raise
the seatback until it locks upright.
7. Push and pull on the seatback
to check that it is
locked into place.
A CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked,it could move
forward ina sudden stopor crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always
press rearward on the seatbackto be sure it
is locked.
1-12
1
8. Attach the mini-buckle so that the safety belt is
ready for use when a passenger uses the seat.
The buckle reattachesby pushing the latchinto the
buckle until the red center
pops out again.
A safety beltthat is twistedor not properly
attached won’t provide the protection needed
in a
crash. The person wearing
the belt could be
seriously injured. After installing
the seat, always
check to be sure thatthe safety beltsare not
twisted and are properly attached.
Third Row Solid BenchSeats
Adjusting the ThirdRow Solid Bench Seat
Folding the Seatback
To fold down the seatback, pullthe nylon strap on the
back of the seat.
To raise the seatback, pull
the nylon strapwhile raising
the seatback untilit locks
upright. Push and pull on
the seatback tocheck that it
is locked.
1-13
I
Removing the ThirdRow Solid Bench Seat
1. Pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat to fold
the seatback forward.
2. Slide the seat all theway back by either lifting the
front adjusterbar and pushing back,or by lifting the
handle on the back of the seat and pulling the seat
towards the rearof the vehicle.
There are two levers to adjust
the seat forward or
rearward. They are below the center position
of the
bench, one in front and one in back of the seat.
forward to allow
Lift up eitherlever and slide the seat
for extra storage behind the seat, or slide the seat back to
allow extra roomfor third row passengers. Release the
lever. Push and pullon the seat to be sure it is locked
into place.
3. From behind the bench seat, pull the nylon
straps at
the baseof the seat to release the rear latches
from
the floor pins.
1-14
4. Do not let go of the straps until the seatis folded all
the way forward.
;q.
fi
6. Remove the seat by
rocking it slightly
toward therear of the
vehicle and then pulling
it out. This should be
done in one motion.
.........
........
,
5. Unhook the front latches by rolling up the gray
handle under the seat untilthe handle locks.
1-15
Replacing the ThirdRow Solid Bench Seat
Don’t putthe bench seat inso it faces rearward because
it won’t latch thatway. If you wantmore storage room
behind the seat, adjustthe seat by slidingit forward.
The solid benches have seat position labels, located
on
the back of the seat, showing where
the seat mustgo.
Follow that diagram. Use all
of the setsof floor cups in
the thirdrow, G , H, I and J sets of floor cups.See “Seat
Controls” in the beginning
of this section for more
details. The seat must be placed in the proper location
for the legs to attach correctly.
Make sure the seat in
is the full rear position before
beginning this procedure.
1. Place the front hooks
of the bench seat onto
the front two floor pins
in the third row.To do
this, the seat will need to
be angledso that the
front hooks clear the
floor pins.
1-16
2. With the seat still folded forward, roll down the gray
handle underneath the seat to lock the front latches.
3. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear
legs will not attach to the rear of
setfloor pins.
4. If the front latches are not attaching correctly, check
that the seatis in the full rear position.
5. Firmly push the rear hooksinto the rear floor pinsby
of the seat.
pushing down on the rear
6. Try to raise the bench seat to check that
it is
locked down.
1-17
Split Bench Seats
1
If you have the split bench seat
(50/50or 40/60), the
seatbacks canbe folded down individually and the
sections can be removed individually.
The sections can
also be adjusted forward or rearward individually.
A seat thatisn’t locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or suddenstop. People
in thevehicle could be injured.Be sure tolock
the seat into place properly when installing it.
The second row (40/60) split bench may be equipped
with built-in child restraint@).
See “Built-In Child
Restraint” in the Index.
7. Pull the nylon strapon the back of the seat and raise
the seatback untilit locks upright.
8. Push and pull on theseatback to check that it is
locked into place.
1-18
To fold down the seatback on
either section of the split
bench seat, pull the nylon strap
on the back of the seat or
lift up on the lever on the front
of the seatback.
To raise either seatback,
pull the nylon strap on the
back of the seat while
raising the seatback until
it
locks upright. Push and pull
on the seatback tocheck
that it is locked upright.
If the seatbackisn’t locked, it could move
could
forward ina sudden stop or crash. That
cause injuryto the person sitting there.
Always
press rearwardon the seatback tobe sure it
is locked.
I
Folding or Reclining theSeatbacks
I
Adjusting the Split Bench Seats
Use the lever on the front of the seatback to raiseor
lower the seatback to the desired position.
There aretwo adjustment levers on each section
of the
split benchseats to adjust the seat forward
or rearward.
They are located below the center
of each sectionof the
split bench, one infront and onein back of the seat.
1-19
~
Lift up either lever and
slide the seatforward to
allow for extra storage
behind the seat,or slide the
seat back to allow extra
room for passengers.
Push up the red center on
the buckle with a small
pointed object likea key
or pen.
Release the lever. Push and pull onthe seat tobe sure it
is locked into place.
1. Lift the seatback recliner leveror pull the nylon strap
on the backof the seat to fold the seatback forward.
Removing the Split BenchSeat
Make sure the seatbackis in the upright position and
that the safety belts are on the correct section
of the seat.
The head restraints should be fully down.
For the second row bench, withthe seatback in the
upright position, unhook the
side attachment for the
safety belt.This mini-buckle is located on the right side
of the seat.
2. Slide the seat all the way back bylifting either one of
the adjustment bars andsliding the seat fully rearward.
1-20
3. From behind the bench seat, pull the nylon strapat
the baseof the seat to release the rear latches from
the floor pins.
4. Do not let go of the straps until the seatis folded all
the way forward.
5. To unlatch the front latches, squeeze the angled latch
release bar towardthe straight crossbar.
1-21
6. Remove the seat by
rocking it slightly
towards the rearof the
vehicle and then pulling
it out.
Replacing the Split Bench Sections
Don’t put the sectionsof the bench seatin so they face
rearward because they won’t latch that
way. If you want
more storage room behind the seat, adjust each section
by sliding it forward.
The split benches have seat position labels, located
on
the backof each seat, showingwhere the seat must go.
Follow that diagram.
The left (40) section of the 40/60 split bench uses the
A and B sets of floor cups.
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for the other sectionof the
split bench seat.
1-22
The right (60) section of the 40/60 split bench uses
the C and D sets of floor cups.
The left section of the 50/50 split benchuses the G
and H sets of floor cups.
The right section of the 50/50 split bench uses the1
and J sets of floor cups.
See “Seat Controls’’in the beginningof this section for
more details. The seat must be placed
in the proper
location for the legs to attach correctly.
Make sure the seat is in full
the rear position before
beginning this procedure.
2. To do this, the bench
seat will need to be
angled so that the
front hooks clear the
floor pins.
1. Squeeze the angled gray bar towards the solid gray
crossbar while placing the
front hooks of the bench
seat onto thefront two floor pins.
1-23
1. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear
legs willnot attach to therear set of floor pins.
4. If the front latchesare not attaching correctly,check
that the seat is in the full rear position.
5. Firmly push the rear hooks
onto the rear floor pins
by pushing down on the rear
of the seat.
6. Try to raise the seatto check that it is locked down.
1-24
I
A CAUTION:
1
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock
the seat into place properly when installing it.
7. Lift the seatback reclinerlever or pull the nylon strap
on the back of the seat and raise the seatback untilit
locks upright.
8. Push and pull onthe seatback to check that it
is locked.
I
I
4 CAUTION:
9. Attach the mini-buckle so that the safety beltis
ready for use when a passenger uses the seat.
The buckle reattachesby pushing the latch into the
buckle until the red center pops
out again.
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for the other section of the
split bench seat.
b
I A CAUTION:
A safety beltthat is twistedor not properly
attached won’t provide the protection needed ain
crash. The person wearing
the belt could be
seriously injured. After installingthe seat, always
check tobe sure that the safety beltsare not
twisted and are properly attached.
If the seatback isn’t locked,it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.Always
press rearward on the seatback tobe sure it
is locked.
1-25
Bucket Seats
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
There are three types
of rear bucket seats:RIGHT
ONLY, CENTER OR LEFT and LEFTONLY.
RIGHT ONLY and LEFT ONLY seats may be equipped
with the built-in child restraint option.
To fold down the seatback on either section
of the split
bench seat, pull the nylon strap
on the backof the seat or
lift up on the leveron the frontof the seatback.
The rear bucket seats can
be removed to provide extra
storage. Each seat that has the built-in child restraint
option fits in only one locationin your vehicle, but seats
that don't have the built-in child restraint option can be
moved to different rows.
1-26
To raise either seatback,
pull the nylon strapon the
back of the seat while
raising the seatback untilit
locks upright. Push and pull
on the seatback to check
that it is locked upright.
Adjusting the Bucket Seats
Use the lever on thefront of the seatback toraise or
lower the seatback to the desired position.
There are two adjustment levers
on each seatto adjust
the seat forward or rearward. They are located below the
center, onein front and one in back of the seat.
1-27
Lift up either lever and
slide the seat forwardto
allow for extra storage
behind the seat,or slide the
seat back to allow extra
room for passengers.
Removing the Bucket Seats
Make surethe seatback is in the upright position.The
head restraints shouldbe fully down.
1. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap
on the back of the seat to fold the seatback forward.
2. Slide the seatall the way back by lifting either one of
the adjuster levers andsliding the seat fully rearward.
on the seat tobe sure it
Release the lever. Push and pull
is locked into place.
3. From behind the seat, pull the nylon strap at the base
of the seat or lift the paddle
on the side to release the
rear latchesfrom the floor pins.
1-28
\
4. Do not let go of the straps or lever until the seatis
folded all the way forward.
5. To unlatch the front latches, with the seat folded
forward, squeeze the angled latch releasebar
towards the straight crossbar.
1-29
6. Remove the seat by
rocking it slightly
towards the rearof the
vehicle and then pulling
it out. This should be
done in one motion.
RIGHT ONLY seats that don’t have the built-in child
restraint optionfit only inthe right location of either
row, the E and F or I and J sets of floor cups.
The CENTER OR LEFT seat fits in the center location
or in either left location, theA and B, C and D or G
and H sets of floor cups.
The LEFT ONLY seats that don’t have the built-in child
restraint optionfit only in the left location
of either row,
the A and B or G and H sets of floor cups.
Replacing the Bucket Seats
Don’t put the seatsin so they face rearward becausethey
won’t latch that way.If you want more storage room
behind the seat, adjust the seat
by sliding
it forward.
The bucket seats have seat position labels, located
on the
back of the seat, showing where the seat must go.
Follow that diagram.See “Seat Controls” in the
beginning of this section for more details. The seat
must be placed in the proper location
for the legs to
attach correctly.
1-30
RIGHT ONLY seats that have the built-in child restraint
option fit only in the right location
of the secondrow,
the E and F sets of floor cups.
LEFT ONLY seats that have the built-in child restraint
option fit only in the left locationof the secondrow, the
A and B sets of floor cups.
Make sure the seat is in the full rear positionbefore
beginning this procedure.
1. With the seat folded, squeeze the angled gray
bar
towards the solid gray crossbar while placing the front
hooks of the bench seat onto the front
two floor pins.
To do this, the seat will
need tobe angled so
that the front hooks
clear the floor pins.
2. If the front legs are not attached correctly,
the rear
legs will not attach the
to rear setof floor pins.
1-31
A CAUTION:
A seat thatisn’t locked into place properly can
move around ina collision or sudden stop. People
in thevehicle could be injured.Be sure tolock
the seat into place properly when installing
it.
6 . Lift the seatback recliner lever
or pull the nylon strap
on the backof the seat and raise the seatback until
it
locks upright.
3. If the front latches are not attaching correctly, check
that the seat is
in the full rear position.
4. Firmly pushthe rear hooks onto the rear floor pins
by pushing downon the rearof the seat..
5. Try to raise the seat to check that isit locked down.
7. Push and pull on the seatbackto check thatit is
locked into place.
I A CAUTION:
If the seatbackisn’t locked, it couldmove
forward ina sudden stop orcrash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always
press rearwardon the seatback be
to sure it
is locked.
1-32
I
Captain’s Chairs
Removing the Captain’s Chairs
The captain’s chairs adjustlike the manual front
passenger seats.
I
I
The seatback can be
reclined or raised by turning
the knob onthe inboard side
of the seat.It iseasier to
raise or lower the seatback
if you lean forward and take
the weightoff the seatback.
1
The armrests can be lowered or raised
for entering or
exiting the vehicle.
1. Pull the nylon strap behind the chair to release the
rear hooksfrom the floor pins.
1-33
Replacing the Captain’s Chairs
The left chairgoes in the A and C sets of floor pins.
h e nght chair goes in theD and F sets of floor pins.
1. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins.
2. The seat can thenbe lifted off the front floor pins
and removed from the vehicle.
2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the rear latches
onto the rear setof floor pins.
1-34
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. Italso tells you some things you should not
do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
A CAUTION:
3. Push and pull on the seat to be sure is
it
properly attached.
Don’t let anyone ride wherehe or she can’twear
a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety
belt, your injuries
can be muchworse. You can hit thingsinside the
vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can beseriously
injured or killed. In the same crash,you might
not beif you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properlytoo.
A seat thatisn’t locked into placeproperly can
move around ina collision or sudden stop. People
in thevehicle could be injured. Be sure tolock
the seat into place properly when installing
it.
1-35
It is extremelydangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision,
people riding in theseareas are morelikely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure
everyone in yourvehicle is in a seat and
using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle hasa light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
-1
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says
to
wear safety belts. Here’s why:They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you
do have a
crash, you don’t know ifit will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can
be so
serious thateven buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between.
In many of them,
people who buckleup can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling
up does
matter ... a lot!
1-36
Why Safety BeltsWork
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it'sjust a seat
on wheels.
1-37
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider
doesn't stop.
1-38
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
-
or theinstrument panel ...
or the safety belts
!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get moretime to stop.You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s
why
safety belts makesuch good sense.
1-39
Here Are Questions Many People
Ask @
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
A:
Q.’Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle afteran
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not.But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being consciousduring and after an accident,so
you can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if
you are belted.
e.@
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have
to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags arein many vehicles today and will be
in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only;so they work with
safety belts-- not insteadof them. Every air bag
system ever offeredfor sale has required the useof
safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckleup to get the most
protection. That’s true not
only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-40
If I’m a good driver, andI never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
You may be an excellent driver, but
if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault-- you and
your passengerscan be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest numberof serious injuries
and deaths occurat speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety
belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller
children and babies.If a child willbe riding in your
vehicle, see the partof h s manual called “Children.”
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll wantto know which restraintsystems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with thedriver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’show to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t letit get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly.If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt acrossyou
more slowly.
1-41
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure
it is secure. If
the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle
is
positioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
The lappart of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These
parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull downon the buckle
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stopor crash, or
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-42
Adjuster
Before you begin to drive,move the shoulder belt
adjuster tothe height thatis right for you.
Shoulder
Belt
Height
I-\
To move
it
down, push
down
on the
button
and
move
the height adjuster to the desired position.
You can move
the adjuster upjust by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide. After youmove the adjuster to where you want
it,
try to moveit down without pushing the button
down to
make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder.
The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not fallingoff
your shoulder.
1-43
@
What’s wrong with this?
1
1 CAU d O N :
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder is
belt
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
I
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection thisway.
1-44
@
What's wrong with this?
A CAT'TION:
-
-
You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt is
buckled inthe wrong place like this.In a crash,
the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not
at the pelvic
bones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.
Always buckleyour belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-45
@
What's wrong with this?
You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be much
too high.In a crash, you can slideunder the belt.
The belt force would then be applied
at the
abdomen, notat the pelvic bones, and that could
cause seriousor fatal injuries.Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
A:
The belt is over an armrest.
1-46
&:
What’s wrong with this?
You can beseriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chanceof head andneck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force
to the
bones.
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
You could also severelyinjure internal organs
like your liveror spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-47
@
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly, or ask
your dealer tofix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-48
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt,just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out ofthe way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt isout of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-49
Here are the most important things to know about the -ir
The best way to protectthe fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that bag
the systems:
fetus won’t be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women,
as for
anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
CAUTION:
them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
You can be severelyi n j d or killed in a crash if
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
properly, see “Driver Position” earlierin this section.
crash
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way
as helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejectedfrom it. Air bags
the driver’s safety belt
-- except for one thing.
If you ever pull
are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
the shoulder portionof the belt outall the way, you will
All air bags even reduced-force air bags are
engage thechild restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just
designed to work with safety beltsbut don’t
let the belt go back all the way andstart again.
replace them.
--
--
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side air
impact
bag systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags -- a “Next Generation”
reduced-force frontalair bag for the driver, another “Next
Generation” reduced-forcefrontal air bag for the right front
passenger, a side impactair bag for the driver, and
another side impactair bag for the right front passenger.
Reduced-force frontal air bags are designed to help reduce
air bag. But
the risk of injury from the force of an inflating
even theseair bags must inflate very quickly
if they are to do
their job and comply with federal regulations.
1-50
--
Reduced-force frontal air bags for the driverand
right frontpassenger are designed to work only in
moderate tosevere crashes where the frontof your
vehicle hits something. They aren’t designed to
inflate at all in rollover, rem, side or low-speed
frontal crashes. And,for unrestrainedoccupants,
reduced-force frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashesthan more forceful air
bags have providedin thepast. The side impact air
CAUTION: (Continued)
bags for thed r L a ’and right front passenger are
designed to inflate only in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They aren’t designed to inflate in frontal,
in rollover or in rear crashes. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt properly
whether or notthere’s an air bag for thatperson.
--
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate with
great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you’re
too close to aninflating air bag, it could seriously
injure you. This is true even with reduced-force
frontal air bags. Safetybelts help keep you in position
for air bag inflation before and duringa crash.
Always wear your safety belt, even with
reduced-force frontal air bags. The drivershould sit
as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control
of the vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or
sleep against thedoor.
Children who are up against,or very close to, an
air bagwhen it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. This is true even though yourvehicle
has reduced-force frontalair bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offerthe best protection for
adults and older children, but not young
for
children andinfants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt systemnor its air bagsystem is designed for
them. Young children and infantsneed the
protection that achild restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see the partof this manual
called “Children” andsee the caution labels on
the sunvisors and the right front passenger’s
safety belt.
1-51
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows a deployed air bag.
The system checks the air bag electrical system
for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
1-52
How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s frontal air bagis in the middleof the
steering wheel.
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag in
is the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
The driver’s side impact air bagis in the sideof the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-53
into a wall that doesn’t move
or deform, the threshold
level is about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24km/h). The
CAUTION:
threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle
design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this
If something is between an occupant and an air
range. If your vehicle strikessomething that will move
bag, the bag might not inflate
properly orit
or deform, such as a parked car,the threshold level will
might force the object into that person. The path be higher.The driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags are not
designed to inflate in rollovers,
of an inflating air bag must be kept
clear. Don’t
side
impacts,
or
rear
impacts,
because inflation would
put anythingbetween an occupant and an air
not help the occupant.
bag, and don’t attach or put anything
on the
steering wheel hub oron or near any other air
The driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air
bag coveringand don’t let seat covers
block the
bags are designed to inflate moderate
in
to severe side
crashes involving a front door.
A side impact air bag
inflation path of a side impactair bag.
will inflateif the crash severity isabove the system’s
designed “threshold level.”The threshold levelcan vary
When should an air bag inflate?
with specific vehicle design.Side impact air bagsare not
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
are designed to inflate inmoderate to severe frontal or
help the occupant.A side impact air bag will only
near-frontal crashes.The frontal air bags are designed
to
deploy on the sideof the vehicle that is struck.
inflate onlyif the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”If your vehicle goes straight
A
1-54
In any particularcrash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simplybecause of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For
frontal air bags, inflation isdetermined by the angleof
the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in
frontal and near-frontal impacts.For side impact air
bags, inflationis determined by the locationof the
and how quickly the side Of the
deforms*
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity,the air bag sensing
system detects thatthe vehicle is ina crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags,the sensing system
triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag.The inflator, air bag and relatedhardware
are all part of the air bag modules insidethe steering
wheel, instrument panel andthe side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel.In moderate to severe side
collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of
the impact more evenly over theoccupant’supperbody,
stopping the occupant more graduallyBut the frontal air
bags would not help you in many types
of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
the air bag.Side impact air bags wouldnot help you in
many types of collisions, including frontal or near
frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air
bags. Air bags shouldnever be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in
moderate to severefrontal or near-frontal collisions for
the driver’s and rightfront passenger’s frontal air bags,
and only in moderateto severe side collisions for the
driver’s and rightfront passenger’s side impact air bags.
1-55
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
In many crashes severe enoughto inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the
right front passengerair bag.
After an air bag inflates,it quickly deflates,so quickly
that some people may not even realizeair
thebag
inflated. Some componentsof the air bag module-- the
steering wheel hubfor the driver’sair bag, the
0
instrument panelfor the right front passenger’s bag, the
side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver and
right front passenger’s side
impact air bags -- will be
hot for a short time.The parts of the bag that come into
contact with you may
be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There will be some smoke and dust coming
from the
vents in the deflatedair bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t
0
prevent the driver from seeing or being able
to steer the
vehicle, nor does it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
soon as itis safe to doso.
vehicle should get out as
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door.
0
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After
an
air bag inflates, you’ll need
some new partsfor your
air bag system.If you don’t get them, the
air bag
system won’t be there to help protect
you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts.
The service manualfor your
velucle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information
about
the frontalair bag system. The module records
information about the readiness
of the system, when
the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper servicecan mean that an air bag
system won’t work properly.
See your dealer
for service.
1-56
1
!
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag
covering onthe driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback,the bag may not work
properly. You may haveto replace the air bag
module inthe steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s air bag, or both theair bag
module and seatback for the driver’s and right
front passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not
open or break the air bag coverings.
If your vehicle ever gets into a lot
of water -- such as
water up to the carpetingor higher -- or if water enters
your vehicle andsoaks the carpet, the air bag controller
can be soaked and ruined.If this ever happens, and then
you start your vehicle, the damage could make the
frontal and side impact air bags inflate and safety belt
pretensioners activate, evenif there’s no crash.You
would have to replace the air bags, all the sensors and
related parts, partsof the safety belt system and parts
of
the driver and rightfront passenger’s seatbacks. If your
vehicle is everin a flood, orif it’s exposed to water that
soaks the carpet, you can avoid needless repair costs
by
turning off the vehicle immediately. Don’t let anyone
start the vehicle,even to tow it, unless the battery cables
are first disconnected.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Rear Seat Passengers
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle.Your dealer and the Venture
Service Manual have information about servicing your
vehicle and the air bag systems.To purchase a service
manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in
the Index.
It’s very importantfor rear seat passengers to buckle
up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people
in the rear
seat arehurt more often in crashes than those
who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengerswho aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehiclein a crash.And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
I
I
I
For up to10 minutes after theignition key is
turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper
service. You
can be injuredif you are close to an air bagwhen
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. Theyare probably partof
the air bag systems. Be sure tofollow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to doso.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-58
r4..
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next tothe windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wearone properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt
across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
1-59
2. Push the latch plateinto the buckle untilit clicks.
Pull upon the latch plate to make sureisitsecure.
When the shoulder beltis pulled out all the way,it
will lock. If it does,let it goback all theway and
start again.If the beltis not long enough, see “Safety
Belt Extender” at the end
of this section.Make sure
the release buttonon the buckleis positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if
you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulderpart.
n
n
I
I
I
I
The lappart of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
parts of the
over the shoulder and across the chest. These
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s sudden
a
stop or a crash,
or if you pullthe belt very quickly out
of the retractor.
I
A CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt
if your shoulder beltis
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
I
To unlatch the belt, just push the buttonon the buckle.
1-61
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children andSmall Adults
Your vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides.
This feature will provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for small
adults. When installedon a shoulder belt, the comfort
guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head.
If your vehicle has bucket seats in the second
row, there
is one guide for each outside
passenger position. If your
vehicle has a bench seat the
in second row, thereis one
guide for the left-hand outside passenger position.
If
your vehicle has third-row seats, there
is one guide for
each outside passenger position.
To provide added safety
belt comfort for children who have outgrown child
restraints andfor smaller adults, the comfort guides may
be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s
how to install a
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the side
of
comfort guide and use the safety belt:
the seatback.
1-62
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges
of the
belt into the
slots of the
guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The
guide must be on top of the
belt.
1-63
Center Passenger Position
(Bench Seat)
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions’,
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crossesthe shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges togetherso that you can take them outfrom
the guides. Slide the guide
onto the storage clip.
1-64
Lap Belt
If your vehicle hasa third row rear bench seat, someone
can sit in the center position.
~
When you sitin the center positionof the bench seat,
YOU have a lap safety belt, which has
no retractor. To
make thebelt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull
it along
the belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its
free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and releaseit the sameway as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “SafetyBelt Extender” at the endof this section.
is positioned
Make sure the release button on the buckle
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-65
Center Passenger Position
(Bucket Seat)
Lap Belt
When you sit in the center position bucket seat, you
have alap safety belt which hasa retractor.
If your vehicle has bucket seats, someone can sit in the 1. Pick up the latch plate and,in a single motion, pull
the belt across you. Don’t let
it get twisted.
center position bucket seat.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks. If
the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, letgoit
back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch
plate to make sureit is secure.
3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it.
1-66
TO HELP AVOID PERSONAL
INJURY SECURELY LATCH
SEAT Id LOCATION SHOWN
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL FOR
MORE INFORMATION.
Seat Location
I Printed in:
10279595
The center position bucket seat
is a CENTER OR LEFT
type seat. Because itis the only bucket seat with a lap
belt, and has abuckle on only one side, there are certain
places a CENTER OR LEFT type bucket seat should,
and should not,be used. See “Seats” inthe Index. If the
CENTER OR LEFT bucket seat
is used on the left side
of the vehicle, the person sitting there should the
use
lap-shoulder belt. See “Rear Seat Outside Passenger
Positions” in the Index.
4. Position and release it the sameway as the lap part
of a lap-shoulder belt.
If the belt isn’tlong enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at theend of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positioned
so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if
you ever had to.
1-67
Children
Sma'' -r Ch" dren and Babies
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
'
-AUTION:
the distance traveled nor the age and size
of the traveler
changes the need,for everyone, to use safety restraints.
Children who are upagainst, or very close to, an
In fact, the lawin every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children
up to some age
air bag when it inflatescan be seriouslyinjured
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
or killed. This is true even though yourvehicle
has reduced-force frontal air
bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for
adults, but not for
young children and infants.
Neither thevehicle's safety belt systemnor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infantsneed the protection that child
a
restraint system canprovide. Always secure
children properly in your
vehicle.
A
1-68
--
Smaller childrenand babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whether itis
the right type and size for your child.A very
young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt might notstay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough
for one is alwaysproperly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
Infants need complete support, including support
for the head and neck.This is necessarybecause an
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much
compared with the restof its body. In a crash,an infant
in a rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint,
so the
crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part
of the infant’s body, the
back and shoulders.A baby
should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint.
This is so important that many hospitals today won’t
release a newborn infant to its parents unless there
is an
infant restraint availablefor the baby’s first trip in a
motor vehicle.
.
..
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-1b. (110 kg) force on
your arms. Thebaby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
Never hold a baby in your arms
while riding ina
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby
will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in acrash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
Built-in Child Restraint (Option)
L
A
If your vehicle has this option in a bucket seat, each
fits in
bucket seat that has the built-in child restraint
only one location in your vehicle.To find out where a
bucket seat that has a built-in child restraint must be
located in your vehicle, see “Removable Rear Bucket
Seats” in the Index.If your vehicle has this option in a
60/40 bench seat, you may have
one or two built-in
child restraints. This bench seat will only
fit in the
second rowof your vehicle. In both types
of seats, the
built-in child restraint works the same
way.
1-71
This child restraint system conforms to all applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Each child restraintis designed for use only by children
who weigh between22 and 40 pounds (10 and 18 kg)
and whose height is between
33.5 and 40 inches
(850 and 1 016 mm) and who are capable of sitting
upright alone.
BEFORE YOU USE THIS CHILDRESTRAINT,
BE SURE THE TOPOF THE CHILD’S
SHOULDERS IS BELOW THE SLOTS
THAT
THE HARNESS GOES THROUGH.A CHILD
The child should also be at least
one year old.It is
WHOSE SHOULDERS AREABOVE THOSE
important to use a rear-facing infant restraint until the
SLOTS COULDBE INJURED DURING A
child is about a year old.
A rear-facing restraint gives
SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH. IF THE TOPOF
the infant’s head, neck and body the support they would
THE CHILD’S SHOULDERS ISABOVE THE
need in a crash. See “Child Restraints” later
in this
SLOTS, DON’T USE THIS CHILD
section for more information.
RESTRAINT WHILE THE VEHICLE IS
What if the topof my child’s shouldersis above
IN MOTION.
the shoulder belt slots for the five-point child
restraint harness system?
e.’
A:
A child whose shouldersare above the shoulder
belt slotsfor the five-point child restraint harness
system shouldn’t use this child restraint. Instead,
the child should sit on the vehicle’s regular seat
cushion and use the vehicle’s adult safety belts.
1-72
-
Securing a Child in the Built-In
Child Restraint
1. Raise the head restraint until thelower edge of the
head restraintis even with the topof the seatback.
2. Rotate the head restraint rearward untilit touches the
top of the seatback. Make sure there
is no gap
between thelower edge of the head restraint and the
top of the seatback.
1-73
3. Lower the child restraint cushion.
You’ll be using the child restraint’s harness(A)
to secure your child. Don’t use the vehicle’s
safety belts.
A CAUTION:
~
Using the vehicle’s regular safety belts ona child
seated on the child restraint cushion can cause
serious injury to the child ina sudden stop or
crash. If a child is theproper size for the built-in
child restraint, secure the child using
the child
restraint’s harness. Butchildren who are too
large for the built-in childrestraint should siton
the vehicle’s regular seat and use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts.
WARNING! FAILURETO FOLLOW THE
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ONTHE
USE OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
CAN RESULTIN YOUR CHILD STRIKINGTHE
VEHICLE’S INTERIOR DURING A SUDDEN
STOP OR CRASH. SNUGLY ADJUSTTHE
BELTS PROVIDED WITH THIS CHILD
RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR CHILD.
4. Before placing the child in the child restraint, add
slack to the shoulder harness. Pullthe black shoulder
harness release strap firmly. At the same time pull
both shoulder harness straps through the slots in the
seatback as shown.
5. Place the child on the child restraint cushion.
1-75
6. Select onlyone side of the harness. Place the
harness
over the child’s shoulder.
7. Push the 1atch.plate (B) into the buckle until
it clicks.
Be sure the buckle
is free of any foreign objects that
may prevent youfrom securing the latch plates.
If
you can’t secure a latch plate,
see your Chevrolet
dealer for service before using the child restraint.
of the harness over the
8. Place the other side
child’s shoulder.
9. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
I
10. Pull up on both latch plates to make sure they
are secure.
11. Now fasten the left and right halvesof the
shoulder harnessclip together. The purpose of this
clip is to help keep the harness positionedon the
child's shoulders.
1-77
’ A CAUTION:
An unfastened shoulderharness clip won’t help
keep the harness in place onthe child’s shoulders.
If the harness isn’t on the child’s shoulders,
it
won’t be ableto restrain the child’supper body
in a sudden stopor crash. The child could
be
seriously injured. Make sure the harness clip is
properly fastened.
12. Pull the shoulder harness adjustment strap(C)
firmly until the harnessis snugly adjusted around
the child.You should not be able to put more than
two fingers between the harness and the child’s
chest. Make sure the harness and buckle strap
are
not twisted.
1-78
Removing the Childfrom the Built-In
Child Restraint
13. Adjust the positionof the harness on the child’s
shoulder by moving the clip up or down along the
harness. On each sideof the harness, the shoulder
part should be centered on the child’s shoulder.The
harness should be awayfrom the child’sface and
neck, but not fallingfrom the child’s shoulders.
1. Unfasten the shoulder harness clip.
If you expect that the child will sleep while riding,
you can recline the seatback.See “Seats” in
the Index.
1-79
Storing the Built-In Child Restraint
Always properly store the built-in child restraint before
using the vehicle’s lap-shoulder belt.
I
2. Unlatch the harness by pushing the button
on
the buckle.
3. Move one sideof the harnessoff the child’s shoulder.
of the harnessoff the
4. Move the other side
child’s shoulder.
5. Remove the child from the child restraint cushion.
1-80
1. Move both latch plates and both sidesof the shoulder
harness clip to the bottom
of the harness straps.
2. Fold the child restraintcushion and leg rest up into
the seatback.
3. Press the child restraint cushion firmlyinto
the seatback.
4. Then press the leg restfirmly into the seatback, and
secure it by pressing the upper corners againstthe
fastener strips on the seatback.
1-81
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride
in
vehicles, they should have protection provided by
appropriate restraints.
&= What are the different typesof add-on
child restraints?
A:
5. Rotate the head restraint forward and push
it all the
way down.
Just like the other restraint systems
in your vehicle, your
built-in child restraint needs
to be periodically checked
and may needto have parts replaced after a crash.See
“Checking Your Restraint Systems” and “Replacing Seat
and Restraint SystemParts After a Crash” in the Index.
1
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take
into
consideration not only the child’s weight and size,
but also whetheror not the restraint will be
compatible withthe motor vehiclein which it
will be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. With an infantcar bed,
make surethat the infant’s head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant restraint(B) positions an infant
to face the rearof the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designedfor infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and aboutone year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body canhave the support they need in a
crash. Some infant seatscome in two parts-- the
base stays securedin the vehicle andthe seat part
is removable.
1-83
1-84
A forward-facing child restraint (C-E) positions a
child upright toface forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed to help
protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to
18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in
height, or up to aroundfour years of age. One type,
a convertible restraint, isdesigned to be used either
as a rear-facing infant seator a forward-facing
child seat.
1-85
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to
be used ina vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that
it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions
for the restraint.You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or
a in
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt
system in
your vehicle,but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce
the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show youhow to do that. Both theowner's
manual and the child restraint instructions are important,
so if either one of these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
(Except Cargo Vans)
A booster seat (F, G, is designed for
who
Accidentstatisticsshowthatchildren
me saferifthey
are about 40 to 6o lbs*(18 to 27 kg) and about four
are restrained in the rear rather than the front We
seat.at
to eight yearsof age. It's designed toimprove the
General Motors therefore recommend that you
put your
fit Of the vehicle's safety belt system. Booster seats child restraint in
a rear seat. Never put a rear-facing
with shields use lap-only belts; however, booster child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Here's why:
seats without shields use lap-shoulder belts.
Booster seatscan also help a childto see out
the window.
1-86
Where to Put the Restraint (CargoVans)
A child ina rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates,even though your
vehicle has reduced-force
frontal air bags. This is
because the back of a rear-facing child restraint
would be very closeto the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’sbetter to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Wherever you installit, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mindthat an unsecured child restraintcan move
around in a collisionor sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle-- even when no child is in it.
The child restraint mustbe secured properly in the
passenger seat.Never put a rear-facing child restraint in
this vehicle. Here’s why:
A child ina rearfacing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air
bag inflates, even though your vehicle
has
reduced-force frontal air bags. This is because
the backof a rear-facing child restraint would be
very closeto the inflating air bag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in thisvehicle.
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, always movethe passenger seat as
far
back asit will go.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collisionor sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no childis in it.
1-87
Top Strap
There's a vinyl sleeve there; to get to the bracket, push
this
vinyl sleeve aside slightly.You may need to remove the
staple in the sleeve to do this. Anchor the top strap to the
If your child restraint has a top strap,
it should be
bracket. If your vehicle does not have third row seats and
anchored. A childrestraintwithatopshouldonly
belts, orif you need to havean anchor bracket installed for
If your vehicle has third row the center bucket seat in the second row, or for the right-hand
be used in the second row.
seats, anchor bracketsfor the second row outside
side of a 60140 bench seat, you can ask your Chevrolet dealer
positions are locatedjust above the place where the third to put it in for you. you want to install an anchor bracket
row lap-shoulder belts meet the floor.
yourself, your dealer can tell you how to do it.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you'll be ready
to
secure the child restraint itself.
Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part
about the topstrap if the child restraint has one.Be sure
to follow the instructions that
came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run thelap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt throughor
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in
front of the child’sface or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-89
I
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
1-90
4. Pull the restof the shoulder belt all the
way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let
it go back allthe way. The safety belt
will move freely againand be ready to workfor an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Seat Position (ThirdRow Bench Seat)
n
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt backinto
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may findit helpful to use yourknee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraintin different
directions to be sure it issecure.
You’ll be using the lap belt.
Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1-91
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pullingit along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle's safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-92
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
5 . To tighten the belt, pullits free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you're using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may findit
helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraintin different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the
instructions say.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to workfor an adult or larger
child passenger.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Seat Position (BucketSeat)
You’ll be using the lap belt. See the earlier part about
the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to
follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint.
2. Pull the lap belt all the way out without stopping.
3. While holding it out, run the belt through
or around
the child restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
1-94
5. To tighten the belt, feedit back into the retractor
while you push down on the child restraint.
If you’re
using a forward-facing child restraint,
you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down the
on child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint indifferent
directions to be sureit is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
I
A child in a rearfacing child restraint canbe
seriously injured orkilled if the frontpassenger’s
air baginflates, even though yourvehicle has
reduced-force frontal airbags. This is because
the back of a rear-facing child restraintwould be
very close to the inflating air
bag. If your vehicle
is a passenger van, always secure
rearfacing
a
child restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle is a cargovan, do notuse a
rear-facing child restraint in this
vehicle. If a
forward-facing child restraintis suitable for your
child, alwaysmove the passenger seatas far back
as itwill go.
Your vehicle has a front passenger air bag. Never put a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
1-95
You'll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlierpart
about the top strap if the child restraint has Be
one.
sure
to follow the instructions thatcame with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a front passenger
air bag,
always move the seatas far back as it will go before
securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See
"Seats" in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle's safety belt throughor
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder beltgoes in front of the child's face or
neck, putit behind the child restraint.
1-96
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly ifyou ever had to.
5. Pull the restof the shoulder belt all the wayout of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on
the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to useyour knee to push down
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraintin different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt andlet it go back allthe way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready
to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
I
Larger Children
If you have the choice, a child should
sit next toa
window so the child canwear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they
are restrainedin the rearseat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckledup can be thrown out in
a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled upcan strike other
people who are.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-98
I
1
.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properlyspread the impactforces. In a
crash, the two children canbe crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used
by
only oneperson at a time.
What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt,
but the child isso small that the shoulder belt is
very closeto the child’s faceor neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center
of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt
still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
If the
would have the restraint that belts provide.
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see
“Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child isso small thatthe shoulder beltis still
very close to the child’s
face or neck, you might
want to place the childin a seat that has lap
a belt,
if your vehicle hasone.
1-99
I A CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here achild is sitting ina seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulderpart is behind
in thisway, in
the child. If the child wears the belt
a crash thechild might slideunder thebelt. The
belt’s force would then be applied righton the
child’s abdomen. That could cause seriousor
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the
lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips,just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-100
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
If the vehicle’s safety belt will
fasten around you, you
should useit.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.If your vehicle hasa
built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure the
harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, child head
restraint and anchorages are working properly. Lookfor
any other loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child
restraint system parts.If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt or built-in child restraint
system from
doing itsjob, have it repaired.
But if a safety beltisn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you
go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat
you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, andjust forthe seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t letsomeone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it,just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Torn or frayed safety beltsmay not protect you in a
crash. Theycan rip apartunder impact forces. If a belt is
torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.
If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint, torn or
frayed harness straps can rip apart under
impact forces
just like tornor frayed safety belts can. They may not
protect achild in a crash.If a harness strap is torn or
frayed, get anew harness right away.
Also lookfor any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced.
(The air bag system
does not need regularmaintenance.)
1-101
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do
you need new safety beltsor
built-in child restraint parts?
If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps
are cutor damaged, replace them. Collision damage also
may mean you will need to have safety belt, built-in
or replaced. New
child restraint or seat parts repaired
parts and repairs maybe necessary evenif the safety belt
or built-in child restraint wasn’t being used
at the time
of the collision.
After a very minor collision, nothing
may be necessary.
But if the safety belts or built-in child restraint harness
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
straps were stretched, as they would ifbeworn during a
system parts.See the parton the air bag system earlierin
more severe crash,then you need new safety belts or
this section.
harness straps.
If the frontal air bags inflate, you’ll also need to replace
the driver’s and rightfront passenger’s safety belt
buckle assembly. Be sure todo so. Then thenew buckle
assembly will be there to help protect
you in a collision.
1-102
b
NOTES
1-103
b
NOTES
1-104
0Section 2
FeaturesandControls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Alsoexplained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell ifyou
everything is
working properly-- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-8
2-12
2-13
2- 14
2-20
2-22
2-23
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-29
2-30
2-34
2-35
2-37
Keys
Door Locks
Keyless EntrySystem (Option)
Switchbanks
Sliding Door
Power Sliding Door (Option)
Liftgate
Theft
Content Theft-Deterrent (Option)
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
2-38
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-50
2-53
2-60
2-6 1
2-65
2-66
2-78
2-7 8
2-80
2-82
2-86
2-98
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Locks andLighting Choices
Windows
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Sun Visors
Accessory InflatorSystem (Option)
Accessory Power Outlet
Instrument Panel
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Driver Information Center (DIC) (Option)
2-1
Keys
A CAUTION:
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others couldbe badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows
or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't
leave the keys in
a vehicle with young children.
2-2
The master key can be
used for the ignition as
well as all doorlocks, the
liftgate lock and the
storage compartments.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a numberof new features that
can help preventtheft. But you can havea lot of
trouble getting into your
vehicle if you ever lock
your key inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sureyou have an
extra key.
If you need a new key, contact your Chevrolet
dealer, who can obtain thecorrect key code. In an
emergency, call Chevrolet Roadside Assistance at
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872). (In Canada,
call 1-800-268-6800.)
2-3
There are several waysto lock and unlock your vehicle.
Door Locks
From the outside,use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter (if your vehicle has this option).
I A CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors andfall out.When a door is
locked, the inside handlewon’t open it.
Outsiders caneasily enter through anunlocked
door when you slow down or stop yourvehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’tlocked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, andyou will be far
better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.
--
--
To unlock either front door from the outside with
the key, insert the key and turnit toward the frontof
the vehicle.
You can lock either front doorfrom the outside with
your key by inserting and turning
it toward the rear of
the vehicle.
2-4
Power Door Locks
To lock either frontdoor from the inside, push the
locking lever forward.
To unlock either frontdoor from the inside, pull back
on the locking lever.
From the inside, press thefront of the power door lock
switch (on either frontdoor) to unlock all doors and the
liftgate. If your vehicle is equipped with the Content
Theft-Deterrent system, the powerdoor lock switch will
not unlock the doors until the system is disarmed. See
“Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for more details.
2-5
You can lock alldoors and the liftgate from the inside
by pressing the rearof the powerlock switch on either
front door. If your vehicle is equipped with the Content
Theft-Deterrent system,the power door lock switchmay
cause the system toarm. See “Content Theft-Deterrent”
in the Indexfor more details.
Automatic Door Locks
To unlock anydoor or the liftgate from the outside with
your key, turn the key tothe unlock position and release.
This will only unlock thatdoor or the liftgate. You can
unlock all thedoors and the liftgate by holding the key
cylinder in the unlock position
for one second.
You can program the Automatic Door Locks to operate
with the remote keyless entry system and
to lock and
unlock automatically to suit your needs.
See “Locks and
Lighting Choices”in the Index.
With power door locks, you can lock all the doors from
the outsideby inserting the key and turning the key
cylinder to the lock position.
With power locks, when the doors are locked, the inside
as well as the outside door handle cannot open the doors.
This safety feature preventsa door from being accidentally
opened from the inside by moving the handle.
All of the doors will lock automatically when you move
your shift lever outof PARK (P). All doors will unlock
automatically when the ignition is turned off while the
shift lever isin PARK (P).
With the Automatic Door Locks feature,
you can still
lock or unlock thedoors at any time, either manually
or with the power door lock switches.
Last Door Closed Locking
The Last Door Closed Locking feature makes it easier to
use your power door locks to lock allthe doors and the
liftgate when leaving your vehicle.
When any door or the liftgateis open, the first time
To override this safetyfeature, move the locking lever to you attempt to lock thedoors using the power lock
the unlock positionon the dooryou want to open.
switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter
(if
When the liftgate has been unlocked with the power door equipped), will resultin three chimes to signal that
locks, you won’t need the key to open it. Simply squeeze Last Door Closed Locking is being used. All doors
and the liftgate can be opened
for five seconds from
the handle above the license plate. This is also if
true
you
the time the last door
is closed.
use the optional remote keyless entry transmitter. See
“Keyless Entry System” laterin this section.
2-6
Five seconds after the lastdoor is closed, all thedoors
will lock. You can lock thedoors immediately by
using the power door lock switch orthe remote
keyless entry transmitter.
If the ignitionis in RUN or ACCESSORY, thisfeature
will not lock the doors.
To turn the Last Door Closed Locking featureoff or on,
see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.
Sliding Door Delayed Locking
If the sliding door is open whenyou use your power
door locks to lock the vehicle, the sliding door is
not locked. Normally theLast Door Closed Locking
feature will be used to lock the slidingdoor after it
has been closed.
When the ignitionis on or if the Last Door Closed
Locking feature has been overridden or programmed to
be off, the SlidingDoor Delayed Locking feature will
lock your slidingdoor for you. Three seconds after the
sliding door is closed, all thedoors will lock. If you
have the dual sliding doors, alldoors will lock three
seconds after both slidingdoors are closed.
Lockout Deterrent
The Lockout Deterrentfeature makes it difficultfor you
to lock your keysin your vehicle.If the driver’s dooris
open while the keys arein the ignition, you will not be
able to use your power door
lock to lock the vehicle.
If you don’t leave the keys in the ignition or
if you
use the manual door lock, you could still lock your keys
in your vehicle. Always remember to take your keys
with you.
To turn this featureoff or on, see “Locks and Lighting
Choices” in the Index.
T
IQ=
-
lgYourVehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locksfrom the inside. Then get out and
close the door.
2-7
Keyless Entry System (Option)
If your vehicle has this option,
you can lock and
unlock your doorsor unlock your liftgate from about
3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
'
UN
This device complies with RSS-210
of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operationof
the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
'
a
E
This system hasa range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet
(9 m). At times you may noticea decrease in range.This
is normal for any remote keyless entry system.
If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work,try this:
Check to determine if battery replacement or
synchronization is necessary. See the instructions
that follow.
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission(FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2-8
Check the distance.You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the leftor
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
0
If you're still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Operation
Remote Driver’s Door and
All Door Unlock
When you press UNLOCK on the
remote keyless entry
transmitter, only the driver’s door will unlock.If you
press UNLOCK again withinfive seconds, all thedoors
and the liftgate will unlock.
If you would like all the
doors to unlock thefirst time you press UNLOCK,
see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.
If your vehicleis equipped with theContent
Theft-Deterrent system, the UNLOCK button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter willdisarm the
system (see “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index
for more details).
Remote All Door Lock
To lock all doors, press LOCK onthe remote keyless
entry transmitter (see “Power Door
Locks” in the
Index for more details onthe power door lock
features). If your vehicle is equipped with theContent
Theft-Deterrent system, the LOCKbutton may arm
the system (see “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the
Index for more details).
Remote Lock Confirmation
When you use theremote keyless entry transmitter to
lock your vehicle, your parking lamps will flash briefly
to let you know the command has been received. If you
press the LOCK button again, within
five seconds, the
horn will sound briefly andthe parking lamps will flash
to let you know the vehicle is already locked.
If you would like to change the way the parkinglamps
and horn operate with Remote Lock
Confirmation, see
“Locks andLighting Choices” in the Index.
Remote Unlock Confirmation
When you use yourremote keyless entry transmitter to
unlock your vehicleor to operate the power sliding
door
(if equipped), yourparking lamps will flash briefly to
let you know the command was received.
If you wouldlike to change the way the parkinglamps
operate with Remote UnlockConfirmation, see “Locks
and Lighting Choices” in the Index.
Remote Alarm
When you pressthe horn buttonon the remote keyless
entry transmitter, your vehicle’s parking
lamps will
flash and the horn will sound.
This will allow you to
attract attention,if needed.
2-9
Erp
LOCK
I
If you have the optional
power slidingdoor (see
“Power SlidingDoor”
later in this section), your
remote transmitter will
have a button that hasa
van symbol onit. Press
it to open or close the
sliding door.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters withyou when yougo to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only
four transmitters
matched toit.
See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle.
If the sliding dooris locked, first unlock all doors (see
“Remote Driver’s Door and
All Door Unlock” earlier
in this section), then press the van symbol to open the
sliding door. Press the van symbol again
to close the
sliding door.
You can operate the power sliding
door with the remote
transmitter only when the power sliding
door override
switch on the overhead console is disabled.
2-10
I
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery
in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak
work at the normal range in any
get close to your vehicle before
it’s probably time to change the
if the transmitter won’t
location. If have
you to
the transmitter works,
battery.
I
I
I NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your
body transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
Replacing the Battery in the
Remote Transmitter
I . Insert a flat object like a dime into the sloton the side
of the transmitter and twist to separate the halves.
2 . Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not
use the metal flanges to “pop out” the battery.
3. Replace the battery.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make surethe halves are
snapped together tightlyso water will not get in.
2-11
5. Check the transmitter operation. If needed, follow
the instructions on resynchronizing your remote
transmitter.
that are on your vehicle. It is useful to become familiar
with them since theyare used frequently while
operating the vehicle.
Resynchronizing Your Remote Transmitter
Your remote keyless entry system uses a continually
changing code for increased security. Normally, the
receiver in your vehicle will keep track of this
changing code.
Overhead Console Switchbank
Loss of synchronization will occur if the transmitter
is activated more than256 times while outof range
of the vehicle.
Loss of synchronization will occur after the battery
replacement if the transmitter is immediately activated
more than 16 times while out of range of the vehicle.
If your remote keyless entry transmitter has stopped
This switchbank is located in the overhead console.
working, you may need to resynchronize the transmitter
The switches that you may findin this switchbankare
to the vehicle receiver. Todo this, press theLOCK and
the Interior Lights Override, Power Sliding Door
UNLOCK buttons together and hold for at least seven
Override, Power Sliding Door and the Power Rear
seconds or until the horn sounds if equipped with Content Quarter Windows. If your vehicle doesnot have some
Theft-Deterrent. Check the transmitter operation.
of the options controlled by these switches, there will
be a blank button in its place.
Switchbanks
There are two setsof switchbanks located in the front
of the vehicle.The switches will vary with the options
For more information, please see eachof these features
in the Index.
Instrument Panel Switchbank
IF,
L
Sliding Door
To open the sliding door from outside the vehicle, pull
the handle out and then pull thedoor toward the rear.If
you slide the door all the way back, the
door will rest in
a detent position.The door must overcome this detent
when closing.
To move the door forward, you mustfirst pull the door
past the open detent position.
I
This switchbank is located in the instrument panel below
the comfort controls.The switches and controls that you
may findin this switchbank are the Rear Fan Knob, Rear
Window WiperNasher and Traction Control.If your
vehicle does not have some
of the options controlledby
these switches, there will be a blank button its
in place.
For more information, pleasesee each of these features
in the Index.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional rear
climate control system, there will be
a storage space in
this switchbank.The rubber mat can be removed for
cleaning. Snap the mat into place after cleaning.
I
\
CAUTION:
If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep
grade (15 percent or more), the door may not stay
open and could slam shut, possibly injuring
someone. To make sure the door does not slam
shut, be sure to hold it open until everyone is clear
of the door, and only then allow it to slowly close.
Does your vehicle have a sliding
door on the driver’s
side? If it does, this door is designed to open only alittle
if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens, don’t tryto
force the sliding door, Just close the driver’s side sliding
door. Then when thefuel filler door is closed, the
driver’s side slidingdoor can be opened normally.
2-13
Sliding Door Lock
Power Sliding Door (Option)
With this option, you can open and close the sliding
door with the switches inside your vehicle.
If you have
the optional remote keyless entry system,you can also
operate the power sliding door with your remote
transmitter. See “Keyless Entry System” in the Index.
TION:
Leaving young children or pets unattended
in
your vehicle can be dangerous. They could
operate the power sliding door.
A child or others
could be injured.Do not leave children or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Lock the sliding door from inside the vehicle by moving
the manual locking lever down. Unlock itby moving the
lever up.
With power door locks, the sliding door lock has a delay
feature. See “Power Door Locks” and “Locks and
Lighting Choices” in the Index.
2-14
= To operate the power sliding
1
I
c
door, the power slidingdoor
override switch must be
disabled. This switch is
located in theoverhead
console switchbank.
The power slidingdoor override switch will also stop
the door immediately,while the door is opening or
closing, when the override feature is enabled.
NOTICE:
When your vehicle goes through an automatic
car wash, be sure the power sliding door override
feature is enabled.If it isn’t, the power sliding
door may open accidentally.
Pushing the bottom of the button will disable the power
sliding door;it will not operate wheneither of the power
door switches or the power sliding
door button on the
remote transmitter is pressed.
2-15
7
3
7
C
C
C
When the key is in the ignition
in RUN, the power
sliding door will only open if the transaxle is in
PARK (P). The transaxle does not have to
be in
PARK (P) to close the door.
If the override featureis not enabled and the power
sliding door is open or in the process
of closing when
you shift outof PARK (P), a buzzer will sound.
This is a
warning that the sliding door not
is completely closed.
To open or closethe sliding door, press and release
one
of the two powerdoor switches.
One is mounted onthe wall, just in front of the
passenger’s side sliding door.
The other switchis
located in the overheadconsole switchbank.
The sliding door must be unlockedfor it to operate.
The key does not have to be the
in ignition. To help
avoid accidental operationof the sliding door, disable
the power slidingdoor by pushing the power sliding
door override switch.
2-16
If you shift the transaxle out PARK
of
(P) and
accelerate before the power sliding door latches
closed, the door may reverse to the open position,
A child or others could fall out
of the vehicle and
be injured. Always make sure the power sliding
door is closed and latched before
you drive away.
You or others could be injured if caught in the
path of the sliding door. Make sure the door path
is clear before closing the door.
To manually open the power sliding
door when the
power sliding door override feature is disabled, pull
the insideor outside handle and let go. The door will
open fully.
If anything obstructs the power sliding door while it is
closing, the door will automatically reverse tothe open
position, providedit meets sufficient resistance.
Resistance mustbe as strong as theforce of the closing
door, or stronger.The force of the closing door increases
significantly as the door approaches the latched position.
To manually open the power sliding
door when the
power sliding door override feature is enabled, pull
the inside or outsidehandle and slide thedoor all the
way back.
2-17
TIf your vehicle is facing downward ona steep
grade (15 percent ormore), the door may not
stay openand could slam shut,possibly injuring
does not slam
someone. To make sure the door
shut, turn on the power sliding door feature.
Then if the doorcloses, it will closeunder the
control of the power door system.
I
To manually close the power sliding
door when the
override feature is disabled, pull the inside or outside
handle or theedge of the door. Move the door about
4 inches (10 cm) toward the closed position and release.
The door will close completely and latch
for you.
To manually close the power sliding door when the
override feature is enabled, pull the inside or outside
handle and slide the door
all the way forwardto the
latched position.
2-18
Resetting thePower Sliding Door
The power sliding door may operate incorrectly or not
at allbecause of the following conditions:
7. Push either of the power door buttons to open the
power sliding door.
A low voltage or dead battery,
8. Wait five seconds and close the doorby pushing
either powerdoor button.
Disconnecting the battery or
9. Wait five seconds and repeat Steps7 and 8.
If the IGN 1, B/U LAMP, RADIO or PWR
SEAT/PSD fuse is removed or blown.
See “Fuse Panel” in theIndex for more information
about your fuse panel.
If any of these conditions occur, the power sliding
door
will need to be reset.To do this, follow the directions
listed here.It will be easierif you read through them
once before beginning this procedure.
1. Check to be sure the power slidingdoor is unlocked
and securely closed.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. Enable the power sliding door override feature.
4. RI .ove the RADIO fuse from the underhood fuse
anu relay center.Leave it out for 30 seconds.
5. Reinstall the fuse and wait 10 seconds.
6. Disable the power sliding door override feature.
If the door does not rest in the fully
open position
after repeating Step7, repeat Steps 7 and 8 again. If
the door still does not operate correctly,
see your
dealer for service.
Sliding Door Security Lock
Your vehicle is equipped with a sliding door security
lock that helps prevent young children
or other
passengers from opening the slidingdoor by using the
inside door handle.This lock is on bothdoors if your
vehicle has thedual sliding doors.
If you have the optional power sliding door, you can
override the security lockby pressing either power
door switch when the power sliding door override
feature is disabled. See “Power SlidingDoor” earlier
in the section.
The security lock lever 1s located on the insideof the
sliding door, on thefront edge of the door. To access the
lever, open the sliding door. Use the security lock label
on theedge of the door as a guide.
To use the security lock,
move the securitylock lever
all theway up and close the
door from the outside.
You should let adults and older children know how the
security lock works, and how to cancel the lock.
If you
don’t, adultsor older children who ride in the rear won’t
be able to open the sliding door from the inside when
the security lock feature is in use.
Canceling the SlidingDoor Security Lock
1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door from
the outside.
2. Move the security lock lever all the way down.
The sliding door lock will now work normally.
If you have the optional power sliding door, disable the Liftgate
power sliding door by pushing the override switch on
To unlock the liftgatefrom the outside, turn the
key in
the overhead console.The power sliding doorcannot be
the cylinder to the right.
To lock the liftgate using the
opened from the inside when this feature inisuse.
key, turn the key to the left.
If you want to open the sliding
door when the security
Open the liftgate using the handle above the license
lock is on, unlock the sliding
door and open thedoor
plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise
by
from the outside.
itself. Lamps in the rear
of the vehicle will come on,
If you have the optional power sliding door, disable the illuminating the rear cargo area (see “Interior Lamps”
power sliding door override feature. Press either power in the Index).
door switch.
2-20
A light on your instrument panel will warn
you if the
liftgate is not completely closed (see “Door Ajar
Warning Light” in theIndex).
NOTICE:
Be sure there areno overhead obstructions, such
as a garage door, beforeyou open the liftgate.
You could slamthe liftgate into something and
break the glass.
I
To close the liftgate, pull downon the handle, then
firmly shut the liftgate. Don’t drive with the liftgate
open, even slightly. See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index.
It can be dangerous to drivewith the liftgate
open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can
come intoyour vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.
If you must drivewith the liftgate openor if
electrical wiringor other cable connections
must pass through the seal
between the body
and theliftgate:
Make sure allwindows are shut.
l b r n the fan on your heating orcooling
system toits highest speedwith the setting
on bi-level (outside air buttonis pressed).
That will force outside air into your
vehicle.
See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.
0 If you have air outletson or under the
instrument panel, open them all theway.
See “Engine Exhaust’’ in the Index.
2-21
Theft
Parking at Night
Vehicle theft is big business, especially
in some cities.
Although your vehicle has
a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing
we put on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, thereare ways you
can help.
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables of
outsight.
Put themin a storage area, or take them with you.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, an
it’s
easy targetfor joy riders or professional thieves-- so
don’t do it.
When you park yourChevrolet and open the driver’s
door, you’ll heara chime reminding you to remove
your keyfrom the ignition and takeit with you.
Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked,
and so will your ignition and transaxle. And remember
to lock the doors.
2-22
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your key.
But what if you have to leave your
key? What if you
have to leave something valuable
in your vehcle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
0
Lock all the doors exceptthe driver’s.
Content Theft-Deterrent (Option)
If your vehicle has this option,
it has a theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Once armed, the alarm willgo off if someone tries to
enter the vehicle (without using
the remote keyless entry
transmitter or a key), breaks a window, tries to damage
the vehicle or turns the ignition on.
The horn will sound
and your vehicle’s parking lamps will flash
for up to
two minutes. The system will alsocut off the fuel
supply, preventing the vehicle from being driven.
When the alarm is armed, the liftgate may
be opened
with the remote keyless entry transmitter or with a key.
Arming with the PowerLock Switch
Your alarm system will arm when you use either power
lock switch to lockthe doors while anydoor or the
liftgate is open and the keyis removed from the ignition
(if you would liketo turn off power lock switch arming,
see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index).
A light located on top of your instrument panel (near the
center of the vehicle, next to the windshield) will flash
slowly tolet you know that the system has been armed.
While armed, the doors will not unlock withthe power
lock switch.
The security light flashes quicklyto let you know when
the systemis ready to arm with the power door lock
switches. The security light will stop flashing and stay
on, when you press the rear of the power lock switch, to
let you know the system is arming. After all doors and
the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will
begin flashing at a very slow rate
to let you know the
system is armed.
2-23
Arming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system willarm when you use your remote
keyless entry transmitter to
lock the doors,if the key is
not in the ignition. The security light will turn
on to let
you know the systemis arming. After all doors and the
liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will
begin flashing ata very slow rateto let you know the
system is armed.
Arming with Your Key
Your alarm system willarm when you use your key to
lock the doors. The security light will
turn on to let you
know the systemis arming. After all doors and the
liftgate are closed and locked,
the security light will
begin flashing ata very slow rateto let you know the
system is armed. If you would like your key not to
arm the system, see “Locksand Lighting Choices”
in the Index.
2-24
Arming Confirmation
If remote unlock confirmationis on (see “Locks and
Lighting Choices”in the Index), your parking lamps
will flash briefly to let you know when your alarm
system has armed.
Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter
to unlock the doors.
The security light will stop flashing
to let you know the
system is no longer armed.
Disarming with YourKey
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key
to unlock the doors.The security light will stop flashing
to let you know the systemis no longer armed. If you
would like your key not to disarm the alarm system,
see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.
Nuisance Alarms
If you experience nuisance alarms (alarms which are
not caused by the opening of a door or the liftgate and
are not desirable), you may need to reduce the damage
detection sensitivity. Try programming the Content
Theft-Deterrent to Mode1.
New Vehicle 4LBreak-In’’
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’tneed an elaborate
“break-in.” But itwill perform better in thelong
If you continueto experience nuisance alarms, you
run if you followthese guidelines:
may want to try turning off damage detection by
0 Don’t drive at any one speed
fast or
2.
programming your Content Theft-Deterrent to Mode
slow for the first500 miles (805 km).
If you are still having trouble with nuisance alarms,
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
you can turn off the Content Theft-Deterrent system by
Avoid making hard stops for thefirst
3.
programming your Content Theft-Deterrent to Mode
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
See “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index for more
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
information. See your dealer or qualified technician
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
for service.
premature wear and earlierreplacement.
Follow this breaking-inguideline every
time you get newbrake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer duringbreak-in.
See “Towinga ’Ikailer” in the Indexfor
more information.
--
--
2-25
Ignition Positions
With the ignition key inthe ignition switch, you canturn
the switch tofive positions.
C
A
E
ACCESSORY (A): This is an on position in which you
can operate your electrical power accessories. Press
in
the ignition switchas you turn the top ofit toward you.
2-26
LOCK (B): This is the only position in which you can
remove thekey. This locks your steering wheel, ignition
and transaxle.
OFF (C): This position unlocks the steering wheel,
ignition and transaxle, but does not send electrical
power to any accessories. Use this position if your
vehicle must be pushedor towed, but never try to
push-start your vehicle. A warning chime will sound if
you open the driver’s
door when the ignition is off and
the key is in the ignition.
RUN (D): This is an on position to which the switch
returns after you start your engine and release
the
switch. The switch staysin RUN when the engine is
running. But even when the engine
is not running, you
can useRUN to operate your electrical power
accessories, and to display some instrument panel
warning lights.
START (E): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, releasethe key. The ignition switch will
return to RUN for normal driving.
Note that even ifthe engine is not running,
the positions
ACCESSORY and RUNare positions that allow youto
operate your electrical accessories, such
as the radio.
NOTICE:
warm. I
If your key seems stuck inLOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sureyou are using the correctkey; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and rightwhile you turn the
key hard. But turnthe key only with your hand.
Using a tool to forceit could break thekey or the
ignitionswitch. If none of thisworks,thenyour
vehicle needs
service.
gets
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to
PARK (P) if your Chevrolet
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignitionkey to START.Whentheenginestarts,
let
go ofkey.
the
The idle speed
will
goyour
down
as
engine
Starting Your Engine
Move your shiftlever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position
-- that’s a
safety feature.To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at atime will cause your battery to
be drained muchsooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter
motor.
2-27
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START. If it doesn’t startin three seconds (or starts
but then stops), push the accelerator pedal about
one-quarter of the way down for 12 more seconds,
or untilit starts.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try this:
Wait 15 seconds to letthe starter motor cool down.
Then push your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor. Holdit there. Then hold the key in START.
This clears the extra gasoline
from the engine. When
the engine starts, letgo of the key and the accelerator
pedal. If theengine still doesn’t start, wait another
15 seconds and repeat this step.
2-28
I
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to workwith the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates.Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see
the partof this manual thattells how to do it
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Engine Coolant Heater(If Equipped)
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
A C.
[JTIO :
Plugging the cord into
an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord intoa properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use
a
heavy-duty three-pro: extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
_____~
In very cold weather, 0”F (- 18O C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll
get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
of
four hours priorto starting your vehicle.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cordas itwas before tokeep it away
from movingengine parts. If you don’t,it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer dependson the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Insteadof
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for
that particular area.
2-29
If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), ease pressureon
the shift lever-- push the shift lever all the way into
There are several different positions
for your shift lever.
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See
I
“Shifting Out ofPARK (P)”inthissection.
(
Automatic Transaxle Operation
I
PRND321
PARK (P): This locks yourfront wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your
engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
Ensure the shift leveris fully inPARK (P) before
starting the engine.Your vehicle hasa Brake-Transaxle
Shift Interlock (BTSI).You have to fullyapply your
regular brakesbefore you can shiftfrom PARK (P)
when the ignition keyis in RUN.As you step on the
brake pedal, while inPARK (P), you may hear a click
from the solenoidof the BTSI.This ensures that the
BTSI is operating properly.
I
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in theIndex. If
you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer‘’
in the Index.
REVERSE (R):Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting out of PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N)
while your engineis “racing” (runningat high
speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or
objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engineis racing.
Shifting toREVERSE (R)while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift toREVERSE (R) only after yourvehicle
is stopped.
to get outof snow,
To rock your vehicle back and forth
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, yourengine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
I
I NOTICE:
1
Damage to your transaxle caused
by shifting out
of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine
racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
2-31
I
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIW (D): This position is
for normal driving.If you need more powerfor passing,
and you’re:
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedalabout halfway down.
Going about 35 mph(55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all theway down.
SECOND (2):This position gives you more power, but
lower fuel economy.You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you
go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakesoff and on.
I NOTICE:
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
THIRD (3): This position is also usedfor normal
driving, butit offers more power and lower fuel
economy thanAUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are some timesyou might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
When towing a trailer(so there is less shifting
between gears).
When going down a steep hill.
2-32
Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than 25
miles
(40km),or at speeds over 55 mph(90 km/h), or
you can damage your transaxle. Use THIRD (3) or
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as much as
possible. Don’t shift into SECOND (2)unless you
are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h) or you
can damage your engine.
NOTICE:
If your vehicle seems tostart up ratherslowly,
or if it seems not to shift gears you
as go faster,
something maybe wrong with a transaxle system
sensor. If you drive veryfar that way, your
vehicle can be damaged.So, if this happens,
have your vehicle serviced rightaway. Until then,
you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving
less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD(3) for
higher speeds.
FIRST (1): This position givesyou even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than
SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or deep
in snow or mud.If
the selector leveris put in FIRST (l),the transaxle
won’t downshift intof i s t gear until the vehicleis
going slow enough.
NOTICE:
If your frontwheels can’t rotate, don’ttry to
drive. This might happen
if you were stuck in
very deep sandor mud or
were up againsta
solid object. You could damage yourtransaxle.
Also, if you stop whengoing uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This couldoverheat and damage the
PARK (P)
transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into
to holdyour vehicle in positionon a hill.
2-33
Parking Brake
*:>:
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right
foot and push downthe
parking brake pedal with
your left foot.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot while you push down
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
(To
release the tension on the parking brake cable,
you will
need to apply about the same amount
of pressure to the
parking brake pedalas you did when you set the parking
brake.) When you remove your foot from the parking
brake pedal, it will pop up to the released position.
NOTICE:
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on. See “Brake System Warning Light”
in the Index.
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakesto overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and
are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer”in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-34
Shifting Into PARK (P)
A CAL J O N :
It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle
can move suddenly. You or otherscould be
injured. To be sure yourvehicle won’t move,
even when you’re on fairlylevel ground, use
the steps thatfollow. If you’re pulling a trailer,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake with your left foot.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position
like this:
I-i
\
Pull the lever toward you.
Leaving Your Vehicle Withthe
Engine Running
Move the lever upas far asit will go.
3. Move the ignition keyto LOCK.
4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can
leave your vehicle withthe ignition key in your
hand, your vehicleis in PARK (P).
2-36
It canbe dangerous toleave your vehicle with
the engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly
set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running,it could
overheat andeven catch fire.You or otherscould
be injured.Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine runningunless you have to.
If you have toleave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicleis in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave
it. After
you’ve moved the shift leverinto PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down.See if you can move the
shift lever awayfrom PARK (P) without first pulling
it toward you. If you can,
it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK(P).
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the
vehicle may puttoo much force on the parking pawlin
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in
the Index.
Your vehicle hasa Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock
(BTSI). You have to fullyapply your regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition
is in RUN.
When you are readyto drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, youmay need to have another
vehicle push yoursa little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the
transaxle, so
you can pullthe shift lever out of PARK (P).
As you step on the brake pedal, while in PARK (P),
you may hear a click from the solenoid of the BTSI.
This ensures that the BTSIis operating properly. See
“Automatic TransaxleOperation” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move theshift lever into the gear you want.If you ever
hold the brake pedal down butstill can’t shift out of
PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as youcan.
2-37
Parking Over Things That Burn
Things that can burn
could touch hot exhaust
parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Don't park
over papers,leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-38
Eng'qe Exhaust
Engine exhaust cankill. I t contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO),which you can't see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.
You might have exhaust coming
in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
0 Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on theroad o r over road debris.
0 Repairs weren't done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system hadbeen
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is
coming into
your vehicle:
0 Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out anyCO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
A CAUTION:
It’s better notto park with theengine running. But if
ever you have to, here are some things to know.
A CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the
air system control
off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in aclosed-in placecan let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO)into your vehicle even
if the fan switchis at the highest setting. One
place this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. (See
“Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
-0
It canbe dangerous toget out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always setyour parking brake and
move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper stepsto be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
2-39
Locks and Lighting Choices
Your vehicle’s locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features. The features you can
program dependon the options that came with your vehicle. The following chart shows the features that can be
programmed. To determine which features your vehicle
is equipped with, follow the steps listed
for entering the
programming mode.
Fea Are
Delayed Automatic Last Door
Remote
Illurnma- Door Locks Closed
Driver’s
tion/
Locking/
Door
Exit
Lockout
Unlock
Lighting
Deterrent
Control
Number
of Chimes
Sounded
2
3
4
2-40
X
X
X
X
1
~-
~
X
X
Remote
Lock/
Unlock
Confirma tion
X
Theft
Content
Theft
Arming/
Disarming
X
X
Content
Entering Programming Mode
Delayed Illumination and Exit Lighting
To program features, your vehicle mustbe in the
programming mode. Follow these steps:
With Delayed Illumination, the interiorlamps will stay
on for about 25 seconds after allthe doors and the
liftgate are closed.
1. The Content Theft-Deterrent system (if equipped)
must be disarmed. See “Content Theft-Deterrent
System” in this section.
2. Remove the BCM PRGRM fuse from the instrument
panel fuse block, located tothe right of the glove
box. (See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.)
With Exiting Lighting, the interiorlamps will come on
and stay onfor about 25 seconds whenever you remove
the key from the ignition.
To customize these features to your preference, see
“ProgrammableModes” following.
3. Close the driver’s door.
Programmable Modes
4. Turn the ignition switch towards you to
ACCESSORY.
Your vehicle can be programmed to
one of the
following modes.
5 . Count the number of chimes you hear. You will
hear two to four chimes depending on the features
your vehicle isequipped with. Refer to the chart
shown previously.
You can now programyour choices.
To exit the programming mode,follow the steps
listed under “ExitingProgramming Mode” later in
this section.
Mode 1: Both Features Off (The interior lamps will
turn on oroff at the same instant that
a door is opened
or closed.)
Mode 2: Delayed Illumination Only(The interior lamps
will stay onfor about 25 seconds after all thedoors and
liftgate are closed,or until you lock the doors.)
Mode 3: Exit Lighting Only (The interior lamps
will come on whenever you remove the key from the
ignition and stay onfor about 25 seconds, or until you
lock the doors.)
2-41
Mode 4: Both Features On (This combines Modes
2
and 3.)
Automatic Door Locks
To change the mode:
With Automatic Door Locks, all doors will
automatically lock when you shiftout of PARK (P) and
automatically unlock when the ignitionis turned to OFF.
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
To customize these features to your preference,
see
“Programmable Modes” following.
2. Turn the interior lamps dial all the way to the right
and then back slightlyto the left.
Programmable Modes
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode4.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear.The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle
is in.
You can change the mode by turning
the interior
lamps dial all the way to the right and then back
slightly to the left.
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes
that matches the mode you want.
The mode you selectedis now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this sectionor program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-42
.
.
Your vehicle canbe programmed to oneof the
following modes.
Mode 1: Both Features Off (Automatic door locking
and unlocking is disabled. You will always need to
lock your doors manually before driving to increase
occupant safety.)
Mode 2: Automatic Door Locking Only
The automatic door unlock feature is turned off.
0 Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
driver’s door closed; all doors will lock automatically.
Mode 3: Automatic Unlocking with the Ignition Off
Turn off the ignition with the transaxle in PARK (P);
all doors will unlock automatically.
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
driver’s door closed;all doors will lock automatically,
Mode 4: Automatic Unlocking with Transaxle in
PARK (P)
0 Shift into PARK (P) with the ignition on; all doors
will unlock automatically.
0
Last Door Closed Locking and
Lockout Prevention
With the Last Door Closed Locking and Lockout
Prevention features, your vehicle willdo the following:
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
driver’s door closed,all doors will lock automatically.
If you leave your key in the ignition and leave the
driver’s door open, you won’tbe able tolock the
doors using the powerdoor lock switch.
Vehicles are delivered programmed inMode 3.
To change the mode:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press LOCK on the power door lock switch.
3. Count the numberof chimes you hear. The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is
in.
You can change the mode by pressing LOCK again.
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes
that matches themode you want.
0
When you press LOCK on the power doorlock
switch or remote keyless entry transmitter(if
equipped) while anydoor or the liftgate is open,
the doors will not lock. Instead you will hear three
chimes which let you know that theLast Door
Closed Locking featureis in operation.Five seconds
after all thedoors and the liftgate are closed, allthe
doors and the liftgate will automatically lock.
To customize these features to your preference, see
“ProgrammableModes” following.
The mode you selected is nowset. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-43
Programmable Modes
2. Press UNLOCK on the power door lock switch.
Your vehicle can be programmed toone of the
following modes.
3. Count the numberof chimes you hear. The
number of chimes tells you which mode your
vehicle is in.You can change the mode by pressing
UNLOCK again.
Mode 1: Both FeaturesOff (Doors will always lock
immediately when you press LOCK on the the power
door lock switch or theremote keyless entry transmitter,
if equipped.)
Mode 2: Lockout Deterrent Only (Ifyou leave your key
in the ignition with the driver’s door open,
you won’t be
able to lock the doors with the power door
locks).
Mode 3: Last Door Closed Locking Only
(If the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter
(if
equipped) is used to lock the vehicle while any
door or
the liftgate is open, you will
hear three chimes.The
doors will not lock. Fiveseconds after the lastdoor is
closed, alldoors and liftgate will lock.)
Mode 4: Both FeaturesOn (This combines Modes2
and 3.)
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode
4.
To change the mode:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2-44
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the numberof chimes
that matches the mode you want.
The mode you selectedis now set. You can either exit
the programming modeby following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Remote Driver’s Unlock Control
With the Remote Driver’s Unlock Control feature,
you
can program your vehicle to do
the following:
0
When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless
entry transmitter, the driver’sdoor will unlock and,
When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless
entry transmitter again within
five seconds, alldoors
and the liftgate will unlock.
To customize this feature to your preference, see
“Programmable Modes” following.
Programmable Modes
Your vehicle can be programmedto one of the
following modes.
Mode 1: Remote All Doors Unlock (When you press
UNLOCK on yourremote keyless entry transmitter,
all doors and the liftgate will unlock.)
Mode 2: Remote Driver’s Door Unlock Only (When
you press UNLOCK on your
remote keyless entry
transmitter once, the driver’sdoor will unlock. When
you pressUNLOCK on your remote keyless entry
transmitter again, withinfive seconds, alldoors and
the liftgate will unlock.)
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode2.
To change the mode:
1. Follow the instructionsfor “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press UNLOCK on theremote keyless
entry transmitter.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle
is
in. You can change the mode by pressing
UNLOCK again.
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the numberof chimes
that matches the modeyou want.
The mode you selectedis now set. You can either exit
the programming modeby following the instructions
later in this section or program the next
feature available
on your vehicle.
Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation
With the Remote Lock and UnlockConfirmation
feature, your vehicle cando the following:
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to lock your vehicle, your parking lamps will
flash
briefly to let you know the command has been
received. If you press LOCK onthe remote keyless
entry transmitter again,the horn will sound briefly
and the parkinglamps will flash briefly to let you
know your vehicle is locked and,
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to unlock your vehicle or operate your power
sliding door (if equipped), your parking lamps will
flash briefly.
To customize these features to your preference, see
“Programmable Modes” following.
2-45
Programmable Modes
Your vehicle canbe programmed toone of the
following modes.
Mode 1: Both Features Off (Remote lock and unlock
confirmation are disabled.)
Mode 2: Exterior Lamps Flash Only
0 When you use theremote keyless entry transmitter
to lock your vehicle, your parking lamps will
flash briefly to let you know the command has
been received.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to unlock your vehicle or operate your power
sliding door (if equipped), your parking lamps
will flash briefly to let you
know the command
has been received.
Mode 3: Exterior Lamps Flash andHorn Sound
0
When you use theremote keyless entry transmitter
to lock your vehicle, the horn will sound briefly
and your parking lamps will flash briefly to you
let
know the command has been received.
0
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to unlock your vehicle or operate your power
sliding door (if equipped), your parking lamps
will flash briefly to let
you know the command has
been received.
Mode 4: Exterior Lamps Flash and
Horn Sound (on
Second LOCK Press)
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
lock your vehicle, your parking lamps will flash
briefly to letyou know the command has been
received. The horn will sound briefly and your
parking lamps will flash briefly
if you press the
LOCK button again within
five seconds.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to unlock your vehicle
or operate your power
sliding door (if equipped), your parking lamps
will flash briefly to let
you know the command has
been received.
Vehicles are delivered programmedin Mode 4.
To change the mode:
1. Follow the instructionsfor “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press the LOCK button onthe remote keyless
entry transmitter.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear.The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle
is in.
You can change the mode by pressing the LOCK
button again.
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the numberof chimes
that matchesthe mode you want.
Programmable Modes
Your vehicle can be programmed to
one of the
following modes.
Mode 1: Damage Detection with Reduced Sensitivity
(If anyone seriously damages your vehicle
or opens a
door or the liftgate while your Content Theft-Deterrent
system is armed, an alarm will sound and your parking
lamps will flash for up to two minutes.)
The mode you selectedis now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
Mode 2: Damage DetectionOff (If anyone opens a door
on your vehicle.
or the liftgate while your Content Theft-Deterrent
system is armed, an alarm will sound and your parking
Content Theft-Deterrent System
lamps will flash for up to two minutes.)
With the Content Theft-Deterrent System,
if anyone
Mode 3: Feature Off (Your Content Theft-Deterrent
damages or enters your vehicle while the system
is
system is always disarmed.)
armed, an alarm will sound and your parking lamps
will flash for two minutes.
Mode 4: Damage Detection with Normal Sensitivity
(If anyone damagesor enters your vehicle while your
To customize this featureto your preference, see
Content Theft-Deterrent system is armed,an alarm
“Programmable Modes”following.
will sound and your parking lamps will flash
for up to
two minutes.)
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode
4.
2-47
To change the mode:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Turn the parking lamps on, then off.
3. Count the numberof chimes you hear.The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle
is in.
You can changethe mode by turning the parking
lamps on, thenoff again.
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the numberof chimes
that matches the mode you want.
The mode you selectedis now set. You can either
exit the programmingmode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Arming and Disarming the
Theft-Deterrent System
-.
I
--
- ~A -
To arm and disarm the Content Theft-Deterrent system,
the system mustbe turned on by using Modes 1 , 2 or 4
listed previously in this section under “Content
Theft-Deterrent System.”
With the Arming and Disarmingfeature, you can
program the vehicle todo the following:
Arm the system when you lock the doors using either
power door lock switch while any
door or the liftgate
is open and the key is removed
from the ignition.
Arm the system whenyou lock the doors with your
key or remote keyless entry transmitter and the
key
is removed from the ignition.
Disarm the system whenyou unlock the doors with
your key or remote keyless entry transmitter.
To customize this featureto your preference, see
“Programmable Modes” following.
2-48
Programmable Modes
Your vehicle canbe programmed toone of the
following modes.
Mode 1: Power Door Lock Switch Arming Off
0
The system will arm when youlock the doors with
your key orremote keyless entry transmitter.The
key mustbe removed from the ignition when you
lock the doors or theContent Theft-Deterrent system
will not arm.
0
The system will disarm when you unlock the doors
with your key orremote keyless entry transmitter.
Mode 2: Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Arrn/Disarm Only
0
The system will arm when you lock the doors with
your remote keyless entry transmitter.The key must
be removed from the ignition when youlock the
doors or the Content Theft-Deterrent system will
not arm.
0
The system will disarm when you unlock thedoors
with your remote keyless entry transmitter.
NOTE: While this modeprovides increased security,
it can be a problemif your remote keyless entry
transmitter is damaged, lost orif it fails to operate for
any reason while theContent Theft-Deterrent system
is armed. The Content Theft-Deterrent system must be
disarmed for the engine to run whilein Mode 2; your
key can no longerdisarm the system.
Mode 3: Standard Arming and Disarming
The system will arm when you lock the doors
using either powerdoor lock switch while any
door or the liftgate is open and the key is removed
from the ignition.
0 The system will arm when you lock the doors with
your key orremote keyless entry transmitter and the
key is removedfrom the ignition.
0 The system will disarm when you unlock the doors
with your key or remote keyless entry transmitter.
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode1.
2-49
To change the mode:
6. Remove your key from thedoor key cylinder.
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Insert your second key fully into any door key
cylinder andturn it to the unlock position.
The mode you selected is now set.
You can either exit
the programming modeby following the instructions
later in this section or program
the next feature
available on your vehicle.
This step is inconvenient, but necessary to prevent
accidental programmingof this feature to Mode2.
Do not program this feature to Mode
2 without first
reading the special note
contained in the description
for that mode. Thedoor key cylinder must remain
in the unlock position during Steps2 through 4.
3. Press the horn symbol onthe remote keyless
entry transmitter.
4. Count the numberof chimes you hear. The number
of chimes tellsyou which mode your vehicleis
in. You can change the modeby pressing the
horn symbol on theremote keyless entry
transmitter again.
5. Repeat Step 3 until you hear the numberof chimes
that matches the modeyou want.
2-50
Exiting ProgrammingMode
To exit programming mode,just turn the key from
ACCESSORY to OFF and put the BCMPRGRM fuse
back into the instrument panelfuse block.
NOTE: After programming a feature,you can exitthe
programming mode at anytime.
Windows
Manual Windows
Use the manual crank to openand close the fiont windows.
Power Windows (Option)
I
To activate the auto-down feature, push
the switch all
the way down, then release.The window will lower
completely. To stop the window from lowering all the
way, pull up the front of the switch.
To raise the window, pull up the front
of the switch.
Side Window Latches
I
The rear of each side window swings open.
To open, push the latch
forward to release it, then
swing the window outward.
Press the center of the latch
to secure the windowin the
open position.
If you have power windows, the switches on the driver’s
door armrest controlthe front windows (when the
ignition is inRUN or ACCESSORY). The left switch
controls the driver’s window.The right switch controls
the passenger’s window.
The driver’s power window switch has two down
positions. Push the switch to thefirst position to lower
the window normally.
To close, pull thecenter of the latch forwardand then
close the latch. Press the center of the latch
to secure
the window in the closed position.
2-51
Power Rear QuarterWindows
(If Equipped)
I
c
C
C
This button, located in the
overhead console
switchbank, is used for
opening and closing the
rear quarter windows.
Horn
You can sound the hornby pressing the horn symbolson
your steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive.You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the
Press the top ribbed sideof the button to openthe
windows; both windows will open.
The windows can
be opened fully or only a portion
depending on how
long the buttonis pushed.
Press the bottom symbol sideof the button to close
both windows.
Rear Side Panels (Cargo Van)
The windows on the cargo van
are opaque glass.
These operate the sameas the rearside windows
in the regular van.
2-52
steering wheel and pull
the
lever. Move the steering
wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever
to lock the wheel in place.
Thrn SignaVMultifunctionLever
Turn and Lane Change Signals
4
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
0
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
0
Headlamp HighLow Beam Changer
0
Windshield Wiper and WasherControl
0
Cruise Control (Option)
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrowstarts to flash. Holdit there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane
change, if the arrow
flashes faster than normal, a signal
bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t
see your turn signal.
2-53
If a bulbis burned out, replaceit to help avoidan
accident. If the arrows don’tgo on at all whenyou
signal a turn, checkfor burned-out bulbs and check the
fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from high to low beam,
or low
to high, simply pull the turn signal lever all the way
toward you. Then releaseit.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash at a
When the high beams
normal rate even if a turn signal bulb
is burned out.
are on, this light on the
Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly
to
instrument cluster will
make sure they are working.
also be on.
Turn Signal on Chime
If either turn signalis left on for more than3/4 mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver know to
turn it off.
Windshield Wipers
If you needto leave the signal onfor more than 3/4 mile
(1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn
it back on.
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
marked WIPER.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the
band on mist longer.
2-54
For a delayed wiping cycle, you can set the wiper speed
for a long or short delay between wipes.This can be
very useful in light rain or snow. Turn
the band to
choose the delay time.The closer toLOW, the shorter
the delay time.
For steady wipingcycles, at low speed, turn the band
away from you to the LOW position. For high-speed
wiping, turn the band further toHIGH. To stop the
wipers, movethe band to OFF.
Remember that darnaged wiper blades may prevent
you from seeing wellenough to drive safely. To
avoid damage, be sureto clear ice and snowfrom the
wiper blades before usingthem. If they’re frozen to
the windshield, carefullyloosen or thaw them.If
your bladesdo become damaged, get new bladesor
blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice canoverload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stopthem until the motor cools.Clear away
snow orice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
To wash your windshield, press and hold the windshield
washer paddle. The washers and wipers will operate.
When you release the paddle, the washers will stop, and
the wipers willcontinue to operate for two cycles, unless
your wipers had already been on. In that case, the wipers
will resume the wiper speed you had selected earlier.
b
I A CAUTION:
I
1
In freezing weather, don’t use yc ;washer until
the
windshield
is warmed.
Otherwise
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
2-55
th
I
Rear Window Washer/ Wiper
! The rear window wiper
- switch is located in
the instrument panel
1 switchbank.
Cruise Control (Option)
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed
of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator.This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work speeds
at
below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise
control disengages.
Push the wiper symbol on the bottom
of the button to
turn on the intermittent wiper.To turn off the wiper,
gently push the top
of the button.
To wash and wipe the rear window, push in the washer
symbol on the topof the button. Washer fluid will
spray as long as the buttonis held in. Whenthe top of
the button is released, the wiper will continue
to cycle
three more times.
To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is already on,
push on the topof the button with the wash symbol on it.
of the button to continue the intermittent
Push in the bottom
wiper cycle after the washing cycle is completed.
Cruise control canbe dangerous where you
can’t drive safely at a steady speed.So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause
needless wheel
spinning, andyou could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle isin cruise control when the optional
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage.(See
“Traction Control System” in the Index.) When road
conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you may
turn thecruise control back on.
SettingCruise Cc ’rol
d
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise,
you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
couldbestartledandevenlosecontrol.Keepthe
cruise control switchoff until you want to use it.
3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speedyou want.
2-57
Resuming a Set Speed
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This,
of course, shutsoff
the cruise control.But you don’t need to reset it. Once
you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,you can
move the cruise control
switch from ON to
RESUME/ACCEL (WA) briefly.
There are two ways
to go to a higher speed:
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch R/A
at longer than half a second,
the vehicle will keep
going faster untilyou release the
switch or apply the brake.So unless you want togo
faster, don’t hold the switch R/A.
at
2-58
I
0
Use the accelerator pedal to get
to the higher speed.
Push theSET button at the end
of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll
now cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switchfiom ON to WA. Hold it
there until you get up to speed
the you want, and
then releasethe switch. (To increase your speedin
very small amounts, movethe switch to R/Afor
less than half a second and then releaseEach
it.
time you do this, your vehicle willgo about 1 mph
(1.6 kmh) faster.)
The accelerate feature will work whether or you
not
have setan initial cruise control speed.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
There are two ways toreduce speed while using
cruise control:
How well yourcruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness
of the hills.
When going up steep hills,
you may have tostep on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift toa lower gear
to keep your speeddown. Of course, applying thebrake
takes you outof cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on
steep hills.
Push in the SET button at the end of the lever until
you reach the lower speed you want,then release it.
To slow down in very smallamounts, push the
SET button for less than half a second. Each time
you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When Ending Cruise Control
you take your footoff the pedal, your vehicle will slow There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
down to thecruise control speed you set earlier.
0 Step lightly on the brake pedal; or
0
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Cruise Speed Memory
When you turnoff the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memoryis erased.
2-59
Exterior Lamps
@ Turning the dial to this setting turns on the
headlamps, together with:
0
ParkingLamps
SidemarkerLamps
0
Taillamps
0
Instrument Panel Lights
0Turning the dial to this setting turns
off all the lamps
and lights.
Lamps On Reminder
If the driver’s door is opened and
you turn the ignition
to OFF or LOCK while leaving the lamps on,
you will
hear a warning chime.
~ 0 Turning
0 ~ the dialto this settingturns on:
Parking Lamps
SidemarkerLamps
Taillamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2-60
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others tosee the front of your vehicleduring the
day. DRLcan be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods afterdawn and before sunset.
A light sensoron top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work,so be sure it isn’t covered.The DRL system
will makefront parking and turn signal lampscome on
in daylight when:
The ignition is on,
0
the headlamp switch is off and
0
the parking brake is released.
When the DRL areon, only your front parking and turn
signal lamps will be on.Your instrument panel won’t be
lit up.
When it’s dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will
come on automatically. Whenit’s bright enough outside,
the exteriorlamps will go out and the DRL will turn
on.
Of course, you maystill turn on the headlamps any time
you need to.
To idle your vehicle withthe DRL or exterior lamps
off, setthe parking brakewhile the ignition is inOFF
or LOCK. Then start the vehicle.The DRL will stayoff
until you release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, youshould turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Intensity Control
Turn the control, located belowthe headlamps switch,
to the right to increase the brightness
of the instrument
panel lights, andto the left to decrease the brightness.
Turn the control allthe way to theleft to turn them off.
Interior Lamps Control
Turn the dial all the way to the right to turn onthe
interior lamps, if the interiorlamps override switch is
off. Turn thedial to the left to turnthe lamps off.
2-61
Interior Lamps Override Switch
(-
G
This switch is located in
the overhead console
switchbank. Pressthe
symbol on the bottom
of the
rocker switch to override
control of the interior lamps
and turnoff power to the
courtesy lamps, reading
lamps andglove box lamp.
Illuminated Entry
With illuminated entry,the interior of your vehicleis
illuminated so you can see inside beforeyou enter your
vehicle. The lamps will come on for
40 seconds if you
unlock yourdoor using your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter(if equipped) and the ignition is in
LOCK or OFF. After 40 seconds have passed, the
interior lamps will slowly fade out.
The lamps will
turn off before the40 seconds if you:
lock all the doors using the key,
0
press LOCK on the power door lock switch or
press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter
(if equipped).
Press the topof the interior lamps override rocker switch
When any door is opened, illuminated entryis cancelled.
to turn power back on to
the interior lamps.This will
The interior lamps will stay on
while any door or the
allow the lamps to stay on when any
door is open.
liftgate is open, and slowlyfade out when all doors and
the liftgate are closed.
The interior lamps may stay
on for up to 25 seconds
after all doors have been closed
if they have not been
locked. See “Delayed Illumination” laterin this section.
2-62
Delayed Illumination
Exit Lighting
The delayed illumination feature willcontinue to
illuminate the interiorfor 25 seconds after all doors
have been closed so that you can find your ignition
and buckle your safety belt at night.
Delayed
illumination willnot occur while the ignition isin
RUN or ACCESSORY. After 25 seconds have passed,
the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will
fade out before the 25 seconds have passed if you:
With exit lighting, the interiorlamps will come on for
about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key from
the ignition switch.If you turn the ignitionswitch to
RUN or ACCESSORY,the lamps will fade out. The
lamps will also fade out if you lock the doors with the
power door lock switch or theremote keyless entry
transmitter (if equipped).
0
turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY,
0
lock all doors using the remote keyless entry
transmitter (ifequipped) or
0
lock all the doors using the power door lock switch
or the key.
To turn the delayed illumination feature off or on, see
“Locks andLighting Choices” in the Index.
When any door is opened, exit lighting is cancelled.
The interior lamps will stay on while any
door or
liftgate is open, and slowlyfade out when alldoors
and the liftgate are closed.
The interior lamps may stay onfor up to 25 seconds
after alldoors have been closed if they have not
been locked, see “Delayed Illumination” earlier in
this section.
To turn the exit lightingfeature off or on, see “Locks
and LightingChoices” in the Index.
2-63
Front Reading Lamps
Rear ReadingLamps
There are two reading lamps in the third row headliner,
above the outboard seating positions.
If your vehicle
does not have dual sliding doors, there is also a reading
lamp in the second row on the driver’s side.
To turn on either reading lamp, press the
lamp lens.
Dome Lamp
This lamp is located in the centerof your vehicle
and has no switch of its own. It will go on each time
you open thedoors, unless you enable the interior
lights override.
Cargo Lamp
There are two readinglamps in the overhead console.
To turn on or off either readinglamp, press the lensof
the lamp.To turn off the lamp, press the lens again.
2-64
This lamp is located in the rear
of your vehicle, above
the liftgate opening, and
has no switch of its own. It will
go on each time you open the doors, unless youenable
the interior lights override.
Battery Saver
Your vehicle has a feature to help preventyou from
draining the battery, incase you accidentally leave the
interior or underhood lamps on. If you leave any of
these lamps on while the ignition is in LOCK or OFF,
they will automatically turnoff after 10 minutes.The
lamps won’tcome back on again until you:
Power Remote Control Mirrors
The control on the driver’s
door controls both outside
rearview mirrors.
turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY,
turn the interior lamps dial all the way to the right,
then slightly back to the left; or
open (or close andreopen) a door that is closed.
Note that if your vehicle hasless than 15 miles (25 km)
on the odometer, the battery saver will turn
off the lamps
after only three minutes.
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
Turn the control to the left to select the driver’s side
rearview mirror,or to the right to select the passenger’s
side rearview mirror. Thenuse the control to adjusteach
mirror so that you canjust see the side of your vehicle
when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
To reduce glare from lights behind you, pull the lever
toward you (to the night position).To return the mirror
to the day position, push the
lever away from you.
If you are not adjusting either mirror, leave the control
in the centeroff position. This prevents moving the
mirrors accidentallyonce you have them adjusted.
Mirrors
2-65
Both outsidemirrors can be folded forward or rearward.
In the rearward position, they will fold
almost flush with
the vehicle.This feature is particularly usefulin
automatic car washes.
Your mirrors havea blue tint to reduce glare while
driving at night.
Convex OutsideMirror
Your passenger’s side mirroris convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curvedso you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
I
A CAUTION:
Storage Compartments
Your vehicle’s large carrying capacitycan store many
items. If you have the extended wheelbase version, you
can carry things as large as4’ax 8’ piece of plywood.
You can also use the floor pins that
are used to attach the
seats, to secure larger loads.
This section also describes
storage areas for specific items like sunglasses and cups.
Glove Box
Your vehicle has a glove box below the instrument panel.
To open the glove box,
lift the latch release. Use the key
to lock or unlock the
glove box.
The glove box door has a detent to prevent the door
from lowering too far. Open the
glove box until the door
is partway open, then pull the
door down if you need it
fully open.To close theglove box, the door must be
pushed up past the detent.
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
In the door of the glove box, you will find a tissue pack
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before holder andclip for a pen or pencil.
changing lanes.
2-66
Compact Overhead Console
Overhead Console (If Equipped)
b
The front overhead console includes two readinglamps,
a storagecompartment and a switchbank.
To turn either readinglamp on oroff, press the
lamp lens.
The switchbank has switchesfor the optional Power
Sliding Door, Power Sliding Door Enable, Interior
Lights Override and the Power RearQuarter Windows.
The optional front overheadconsole has reading lamps,
a switchbank, storage compartments, including one for
your garage dooropener and anotherone for your
sunglasses, and aDriver Information Center (DIC).The
features of the optional overheadconsole are explained
on thefollowing pages.
2-67
Reading Lamps
To turn either reading lamp on or
off, press the
lamp lens.
Garage Door Opener Compartment
You can store your garage door opener in the rear
compartment of your overhead console, and operate
it
from this position.To install your garage door opener,
follow these instructions:
1. Open the compartmentby pressing the latch forward.
Remove the pieceof self-sticking Velcro?
2. Peel the protective backing from the Velcro
and pressit firmly tothe back of your garage
door opener.
2-68
3. Line up the button of the garage door opener with
one of the four buttonson the compartment door.
Make sure the garage door opener button is facing
down and press the opener firmly into place.
4. Once the opener is installed, use the black pegs
inside the compartmentdoor to make sure the
lined area on the compartment
door will contact
the control button on your
garage door opener
when pressed.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
5 . Add one peg at atime until your garage door opener
operates with thecompartment door closed when
you pressthe button.
To open the sunglasses storagecompartment in the
overhead console, press the release button.
Then pull the
compartment down to thefull open position.
2-69
Cupholders
Removing and Replacingthe Tray
There arecupholders on the inboard sideof the front
passenger’s seat and the right side
of the second row
bench seat.
To use the cupholders, simply pull down the tray. Keep
the traysup when not in use.
Your vehicle has storagecompartments and cupholders
on either sideof the vehicle, nextto the third row seats.
The seatbacks havecupholders that can be used when
the seatbacks are folded down.
Storage Bin
At the base of the center instrument panel console, there
is a storage bin.To open the bin, lift the latch release
and the door will fold down.
Inside the bin, you will find a tray that slides out. Slide
the trayall the way toward the rear of the vehicle until
the tray locksonto the plastic tabs atthe end of the guide
To remove the tray, slideit almost all theway out. Don’t
rails. The tray holds CDs or cassettesin the center area.
let the tray lock over the plastic tabs at the end
of the
You can also store cassettes in the left side area.
The
guide rails(A). Lift the tray outof the guide rails. The
right side area canhold either the coinholder, which lifts
rubber mat under the tray also lifts out
for cleaning.
out, or another cassette.The tray can be removedfor
When
the
rubber
mat
is
replaced,
be
sure the tabs at the
cleaning or when you want to replace the selectionof
back of the mat are seated in the slots at the back
of the
CDs or cassettes. Slide the tray back into the storage bin
storage bin.
before closing thebin door. The tray can also be placed
in the glove box for locked storage if desired.
2-70
The dividers in the traycan be removedby squeezing
the plastic tabs onthe bottom of the dividers, while
pulling up. Replace the dividersby sliding them down
until the tabs click into place.
Front Seat Storage Net
To replace the tray,line up the guiaes on the bottomof
the tray with the guide rails in the storage bin door.
Slide
the tray back in.
Front Seat Storage Bin
The storage bin is located under
the manual front
passenger’s seat.To open the bin, lift the handle and
slide the drawerout.
There is a storage net that stretches between the
front
seats. Pull the hooks toward the passenger’s seat and
insert them intothe holes nextto the cupholder.
To store the net, liftthe hooks up and outof the holes.
The net does not detach from the driver’s seat.
When not in use, it is recommend that
you unhook the
net to extendits life and retainits elasticity.
2-71
Rear Storage Compartments
and Cupholders
Your vehicle has a storage compartment and cupholder
on either sideof the vehicle, next to the third row seat(s).
Attach the upperloops to the postson either sideof the
liftgate opening (the labelon the net should be in the
upper left-hand corner). Attach the lower hooks
to the
metal rings on the floor.
Cargo Net (Option)
The optional cargo net is designed to help keep small
loads, like grocery bags, from falling over during sharp
turns or quick stops and starts. Install
the cargo net at the
rear of your vehicle,just inside the liftgate.
The side of the cargo net closest to the frontof the
vehicle is higher than the side closest to the liftgate.
Once you’ve loaded items into the net, stretch the higher
side of the net up and over the top
of the loadto hold it
firmly in place.
2-72
The cargo net has a maximum capacityof 100 lbs.
(45 kg). It is not designed to hold larger, heavier loads.
Store such loadson the floor of your vehicle, asfar
forward as you can.
When not in use,it is recommend that you takedown
the cargo net to extend its life and retain its elasticity,
and to keep the rear exit clear.Store the net in the
pouch behind eitherfront seat.
Side Convenience Nets
The side convenience nets aredesigned to hold smaller
items (about 8 lbs. (4 kg.)) than the largecargo net.
Attach the loops to the posts on the rear side panels,
near the jack storage area.
When not in use,it is recommend that you take down
ihe convenience nets to extend their life and retain
their elasticity.
2-73
Lu y e Carrier (0 'ion)
'A
4UTION:
If you try to carry something
on topof your
vehicle that is longer or wider than theluggage
carrier like paneling,plywood, a mattress, and
so forth the wind can catchit as you drive
along. This can causeyou to lose control. What
you are carrying could beviolently torn off, and
this could causeyou or other drivers have
to a
collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You
may be ableto carry somethinglike thisinside.
If you have the optional luggage carrier, you can load
But, never carry something longer or wider than things on topof your vehicle. The luggage carrier has
the luggage carrier on topof your vehicle.
slats and side rails attached to the roof, as well as sliding
crossrails and places to use for tying things down. These
let you load some thingson top of your vehicle, as long
as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
---
2-74
Don't exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle.For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see "Loading
Your Vehicle" in
the Index.
To prevent damage or lossof cargo as you're driving,
check now and then to make sure theluggage carrier
and cargo arestill securely fastened.
Your luggage carrier has
release knobs setin the
ends of each crossrail.
NOTICE:
Loading cargo that
weighs more than 150 lbs.
(68 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage
your vehicle.
When you carry cargoon the luggagecarrier of a
proper size and weight, put iton the slats, as
far
forward as you can. Then slide the crossrail up
against the rearof the load, to help keep it from
moving. You can thentie it down.
Turn the release knobs to the left to unlock
the
crossrails. Slide the crossrails forward or back, as
needed, to accommodate loadsof various sizes.
After repositioning the crossrails,be sure to tighten
the release knobs by turning them to the right.
This
will lock the crossrailsin place.
2-75
Use the adjustable tie-down
loops in the side rails to
help secure large loads.
Reposition the tie-downs by turning them to the left,
then slide them along the side rail.
Turn the tie-downs to
the right to tighten themin place.
Bumper strips on the luggage carrier crossrails helpto
ensure a quieter ride.
If you wish to attach the luggage tie-downs or other
compatible bicycle or ski accessory racks to the
crossrail, use the adjustable tapped plates under
the
bumper strips.
a flathead screw
Lift the endof the bumper strip with
driver and cut off enough of the stripto access the
tapped plates.
Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located in the
middle sectionof the instrument panel, below the
switchbank. Pull out the drawer
to use the ashtray.
To remove the ashtrayfor cleaning, grasp the edgeof
the ashtray with your fingertips and pull up out,
and
in a rocking motion.
To use the lighter, push it all
in the way andlet go.
When it’s ready,it will pop back by itself.
NOTICE:
After removing the tie-downs or other equipment,
be sure to reinstall the the piece
of bumper strip that
was cut.
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while itis heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can makeit overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
2-77
I NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things that burn
into your ashtrays.If you do, cigarettes or
other smoking materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
Side Ashtrays
To open the ashtray, press
the right side and turnit open.
To remove the ashtrayfor cleaning, press the snuffer as
you lift up the bottom
of the ashtray.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, youcan swing down the visors.You
can also remove themfrom the center mount and swing
them to the side.
2-78
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover
to expose
the vanity mirror.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors
(If Equipped)
Pull down the sun visor.
Flip up the coverto expose the
vanity mirror. The lamps will come on when
you open
the cover.
Accessory Inflator System (Option)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an air inflator. With
it, you can inflate thingslike air mattresses and
basketballs, andyou can also useit to bring your tires up
to the proper pressure.
The air inflator is located in the rearcompartment on the
driver’s side.To remove the cover, pull the tabon the
cover and pullit off.
I
I
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured. Be
sure to read the inflator instructions, and inflate
any object only to its recommended pressure.
The air inflatorkit is stored in theglove box. It includes
a 20-foot (6 m) hose with anair pressure gage and
nozzle adapters.
To use your air inflator system, attach the appropriate
nozzle adapter,if required, to the endof the hose that
2-79
has the pressuregage, Then attach that endof the hose
Accessory
to the object you wish to inflate. Remove the protective
cap covering the outlet. Attach the other end
of the hose
to the outlet. Press theON switch. The ON switch will
work even with the ignition off.
Power Outlet
If theair inflator system does not turn on, the fuse may
be blown or installed incorrectly. See “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Indexor see your dealer for service.
Your air inflator will automatically shut off after about
10 minutes. To reset, pressthe ON switch again.
Don’t run your air inflatorfor longer than30 minutes at
one time. If you do, you may damage the system. After
30 minutes, wait at least10 minutes before restarting the
air inflator.
To turn off the inflator, pressOFF and detach the hose,
first from the inflated object, then from the outlet.
Replace the protective cap. Place the inflator kit tools
in the pouch, and storein the glove box.
To replace the cover, line
up the tabs at the back of the
cover and putit in place. Push down the tab to secure
the cover.
2-80
The rear power outlet is located
in the rear compartment
on the driver’s side. To remove the cover, pull
the tab on
the cover and pullit off.
The front power outletis located nextto the ashtray and
lighter. Pull the cover down
to use the power outlet.
The power outlets can be used to plugelectrical
in
equipment such asa cellular telephone, CB radio, etc.
Follow the proper installation instructions that
are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
When not in use, always cover therear outlet with the
protective cap.
To replace the coveron the rear outlet, line up the tabs
at the backof the cover and put the cover in place. Push
down on the tab to secure the cover.
I NOTICE:
When using the accessory power outlet:
Maximum load of any electrical equipment
should not exceed20 amps.
Be sure to turnoff any electrical equipment
when not in use. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended periods can
drain your battery.
2-81
Instrument Panel
2-82
Your instrument panel is designedto let you know at a glance how your vehicle
is running. You’ll know howfast
you’re going, how muchfuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need
to drive safely and economically.
Refer to the accompanying diagram
of your instrument panelto locate the components listed below.
Front
A. Side Vents
SwitchL. Ignition
B.
Controls
M. Climate
Vent
C. Turn Signalhlultifunction Lever
N.Controls
Fan
Rear
(Option)
D. Hazard
Warning
Flashers
Switch
Cluster
E. Instrument
E Center Vents
G. Audio System
0. Accessory
Power
Outlet
Bin P. Storage
Q. Remote(Option)
CD Player
Switchbank
R.
Panel
Instrument
S. LightedAshtray
H. Side Vents
SwitchI. Lamps
ReleaseJ. Hood
K. Horn
Panel
T. Glove Box
U. Front Vents
V. Fuse
2-83
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your cluster includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the following pages.
2-84
Speedometer and Tamper
Resistant (1 I meter
.
’
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour
(km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States)or kilometers
(used in Canada).
Trip Odometer
n
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.
If you see
silver lines between thenumbers, you’ll know that
someone has probably tried to turnit back, so the
numbers may not be true.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
mileage total of the old odometer, then that willbe done. been driven
Since YOU last Set it to Zero. T O Set it to Zero,
push the reset button which is located above and to the
If it can’t,then it’s set at zero and a label must be on
put
the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when right
of the temperature gage.
the new odometer was installed.
2-85
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle.The pictures will helpyou
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is
wrong beforeit becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repairor replacement. Paying attentionto
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or
others from injury.
Warning lightscome on when there may beor is a
problem with oneof your vehicle’s functions.As you
will see in the details on the next
few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start
the
engine just to let you know they’re working.If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or
is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work togetherto let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
2-86
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on
when you are driving, or whenone of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly-- and even
dangerous. So please getto know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the keyis turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds
to remind people to
fasten their safety belts.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 70 seconds. If the
driver’s beltis already
buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows a deployed air bag.The system
checks the air bag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, theair
bag module, the wiring and
the diagnostic module. For
more information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag”
in theIndex.
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stayson after you startthe
engine or comes on when youare driving, your air bag
system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readinesslight should flashfor a few
seconds when you turn the ignition keyRUN.
to If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn youif there is a problem.
Charging System Indicator Light
1+1
The charging systemlight
will come on when you turn
on the ignition as a check
to
show you it is working. It
will remain on as long as
the engineis not running.
It should goout once the engine is running.If it stays
on, or comes on while youare driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system.
It could indicate that
you have problems with a generatordrive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have
it checked right away.
Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.
If you mustdrive a short distance with
the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Brake SystemWarning Light
When the ignitionis on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake.
The light
will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake
is fully released, it
means youhave a brake problem.
2-87
If the light comes on while you are driving, off
pullthe
road and stop carefully.You may notice that the pedalis
harder to push. Or, the pedal may
go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light
is still on,or if the
anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing, have
If the warning light comeson, there could bea brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. the vehicle towedfor service. (See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” and “TowingYour Vehicle” in
the Index.)
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system divided
is
into
two parts. If one part isn’t working,the other part can
still workand stop you. For good braking, though,you
need both parts working well.
BRAKE
A CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
Canadian
United States
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to
RUN. If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
2-88
if the brakesystem warning lightis on. Driving
with the brakesystem warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the lightis still onor if the
anti-lock brakesystem warning light is flashing
after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have thevehicle towed for service.
Ani- ?ck Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will
come on when you start
your engine and it will
stay on for three seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light flashes when you’re driving, you don’t
have
anti-lock brakes and therecould be a problem with your
regular brakes. Pulloff the road and stop carefully. You
may notice thatthe pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal
may go closer to the floor.It may take longerto stop.
Have the vehicle towedfor service. (See “TowingYour
Vehicle” in the Index.)
A CAUTION:
Your regular brake system may not be working
properly if the anti-lock brake system warning
light is flashing. Driving with the anti-lock
brake system warning light flashing can lead
to an accident. After you’ve pulled off the road
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on
longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn
the ignition off. Or,if the light comes on and stays on
when you’re driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again
to reset the
system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again
while you’re driving, your vehicle needs service.
If the
light is on but not flashing and the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on,you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should
come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key
to RUN. If the
light doesn’tcome on then, have it fixedso it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-89
Traction Control System Warning
Light (Option)
This warning light should
come on briefly as youstart
the engine. If the warning
light doesn’tcome on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
The traction control system warning light may
come on
for the following reasons:
If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control system
will turn off and the warninglight will come on. If
your brakes beginto overheat, the traction control
system willturn off and the warning light will
come
on until your brakes cool
down.
0
If the traction control system is affectedby an
engine-related problem, the system will
turn off and
the warning light willcome on.
If it stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, there
may be a problem with your traction control system and If the traction control system warning light comes on
your vehiclemay need service. When this warning light and stays onfor an extended periodof time when the
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
driving accordingly.
2-90
Low Traction Light (Option)
LOW
TRACTION
If your vehicle has the
traction control system,
there will be a LOW
TRACTION light on
the instrument panel.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
%
\
C
When your anti-lock systemis adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid, or when your traction
control system is limiting wheel spin, the LOW
TRACTION light willcome on. Slippery road
conditions mayexist if this light comeson, so adjust
your driving accordingly.The light will come on and
stay on for four seconds when your anti-lock system
adjusts brake pressurefor less than four secondsor
when your traction control system limits wheel spin
for less than four seconds. Otherwise, the light will
go
out as soon as the anti-lock system stops adjusting
brake pressure or the traction control system stops
limiting wheel spin.
The LOW TRACTION light also comes on briefly,
as a bulbcheck, when theengine is started. If the light
doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be there to
tell you when the systemis active.
125
%I
Canadian
United States
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If
the gage pointer movesinto the red area, your engine
is too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.
In “Problemson the Road,” this manual shows you what
to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
..
.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will come on
when yourengine gets
too hot.
Low Coolant Light
If this lightcomes on,
your system is lowon
coolant and theengine
may overheat.
If this light comes on, it means that your
engine coolant
See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index and have your
has overheated.If you have been operating your vehicle vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
under normal driving conditions, you should pull
off the
road, stop your vehicle and turn
off the engine as soon
as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
2-92
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine SoonLight)
NOTICE:
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
CHECK
United States
Canadian
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the
life of the vehicle, helpingto produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on and achime will soundto indicate that there is
a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often
will be indicatedby the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle.This system is also designed to assist your
service technicianin correctly diagnosing any
malfunction.
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may notasbe
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light shouldcome on, as acheck to show youit is
working, when the ignitionis on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn't come on, have it repaired.
This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
0
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and
may damage theemission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and
service may be required.
2-93
If the Light Is Flashing
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap.The diagnostic system can determine
if the fuel
A loose or
cap has been left off or improperly installed.
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into
the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the
cap properly
installed shouldturn the lightoff.
0
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
Did you just drive througha deep puddle of water?
If you are towing a trailer,reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon
as it is possible.
If so, your electrical systemmay be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out.A few driving trips should turn the light off.
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Reducing vehicle speed.
If the light stops flashing and
remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
Are you low onfuel?
If the light continues toflash, when it is safeto do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see
“If the Light
Is On Steady” following. Ifthe light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle
to your
dealer or qualified service center
for service.
As your engine starts to run out
of fuel, yourengine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts
of
air are sucked into thefuel line causing a misfire. The
system can detect this. Adding
fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly.
It
will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.
If the LightIs On Steady
You may be able to correct the
emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index).Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once theengine is warmed up.)
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Have you recently changed brandsof fuel?
This will be detected bythe system andcause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light
off.
If none of the above steps have made thelight turn off,
have your dealeror qualified service centercheck the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper testequipment and
diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electrical
problems that mayhave developed.
Oil Pressure Light
Your vehicle isequipped
with anoil pressure warning
light. Your oil pressure light
lets you know when you
may have a problem with
your engine oil pressure.
Don’t keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot thatit
catches fire.You or otherscould be burned.
Check your oil as soonas possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
r
Damage to your engine from neglected
oil
problems can becostly and is not covered by
your warranty.
When the engine is running and thislight comes on, the
engine oil level may betoo low. There may also be
another problem causing low oil pressure.
2-95
Low Oil Level Light
r
I
Power Sliding Door Warning Light
' This light will come onif
1
the power slidingdoor is
If this light comes on, it
means your engine is low
on oil.
i ill
LWEL
You need to check the oil level right away. Have your
vehicle serviced immediately.
Door Ajar Light
-
This light will comeon if
any of the doors or the
liftgate are not completely
closed and the ignition
is
turned to RUN or START.
not completely closed and
the ignitionis turned to
RUN or START.
If you shift the transaxle out
of PARK (P) while the
power slidingdoor is open or in the process of closing,
and the power slidingdoor override feature is disabled,
a buzzer will sound.This is a warning that the power
sliding door is not completely closed.
1A
C. U [ON:
I
If you shift the transaxle out PARK
of
(P) and
accelerate before the power sliding door latches
closed, the door may reverse to the open position.
A child or others could fall
out of the vehicle and
be injured. Always make sure the power sliding
door is closed and latched before you drive away.
2-96
Fr. _ _ Gage
E
EQ
United States
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage
indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated
the tank was half Eull, but it actually took a little more
or less than half thetank‘s capacity to fill thetank.
0
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner,
brake or speed up.
0
The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Canadian
Your fuel gage tells you about how much
fuel you have
left, when the ignitionis on. When the gagefirst
indicates EMPTY (E), you still have a little fuel left, but
you should get more soon.
After filling the fuel tank, the gage will not read
FULL (F)until the ignitionis turned on.
Here are four things thatsome owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your
fuel gage:
0
0
At the service station, the gas pump shutsoff before
the gage reads FULL (F).
If your fuel is low, the
warning light next tothe
fuel gage will go on and
stay on until you add fuel.
If the warning light is still on after adding fuel, you need
to reset the warning light.
To reset the warning light,
turn the ignitionto OFF then to ON. If the light stays on,
see your dealerfor service.
This light willalso come on when you turn on the
ignition, but the engine is not running,
to show you it is
working. If it doesn’t come on as you start your vehicle,
have it fixed right away.
2-97
Driver Information Center (DIC)
(Option)
Mode Button (MODE): Press this button to cycle
through three modesof operation -- Off,
CompassfI'emperature and Trip Computer mode.
MODE
In the Trip Computer mode, pressing the
button cycles through thefive displays. Press the
MODE button after the last Trip Computer display
to return the DIC to the
OFF mode.
Off No driver informationis displayed in this mode
of operation.
Temperature/Compass Mode:One of eight compass
readings and the outsidetemperature are displayed.If
the temperatureis below 38 "F (3"C),the temperature
reading will toggle between displaying the outside
temperature and the word"ICE" for two minutes.
Compass Variance
The DIC will show information about
the vehicle and
the surroundings.
English/Metric Button (Em): You can change the
display to a metric or English reading at any by
time
pressing EM.
2-98
Compass variance is the difference between magnetic
north andgeographic north. In some areas of the
country, the difference is great enough cause
to the
compass to give false readings.
If this occurs, the
compass variance must beset.
Setting the Variance
The display will show all the display
segments for half a
second toacknowledge the change in zone number.
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set thecompass. When the vehicleis
new, the calibration process may
not be complete. In
these cases the calibration symbol,
C, will be displayed
where thecompass reading is normally displayed.
To calibrate the compass, inan area free from large
metal objects, make three360" turns. The calibration
symbol will turnoff and the compass reading will
be displayed.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic andthe calibration
symbol does not appear, you must manually put the
compass intothe calibration mode.
Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the
Compass/Temperature mode. Press both the
E M and
MODE buttons for approximately five seconds. The
last entered variancezone number willbe displayed.
Press the E M button until theproper variance number,
as shown on themap, is showing. Press the MODE
button to set the new variance zone and resume
normal operation.
Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the
Compass/Temperature mode. Press both the
E M and
MODE buttonsfor at least 10 seconds until the
calibration symbol appears. Release both buttons and
complete three 360" turns in an areafree from large
metal objects.The calibration symbol will turnoff
and thecompass reading will be displayed.
2-99
Error Displays
An error of the vehicle’s speed sensor or fuel sender
will cause -E- to be displayed.
In the absence of vehicle communications, a double
dash “--” is displayed.
Trip Computer
There are five trip computer displays which may be
stepped through by pushing the MODE button.The
information will appear in the
following order:
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECON): This shows
the average fuel economy since the last reset.
0
Instantaneous Fuel Economy (INST ECON): This
shows fuel economyfor the most recent second
of driving.
2-100
Trip Range (RANGE):This shows the estimated
distance that canbe traveled withthe remaining fuel.
The fuel economy used to calculate
range is based on
the last few hours
of driving.
Trip Fuel Used (FUEL USED): This shows me
accumulated fuel used since the last reset.
Average Speed (AVG SPEED): This shows the
average speed since the last reset.
Resetting theTrip Computer
Press and hold the MODE and
E/M buttons for at least
two seconds.The reset is acknowledged with the display
showing all segments on
for a periodof half a second.A
reset can only bedone in AVG ECON, FUEL USED
and AVG SPEED displays. Resetting affectsall three
displays regardlessof which display you are
in.
b%
NOTES
2-101
bh
NOTES
2-102
0Section 3
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how
to operate thecomfort control andaudio systems offered withyour vehicle. Be
sure toread about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-8
3-9
3-9
3- 10
3-12
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Rear Climate Control (If Equipped)
Ventilation System
Setting theClock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Setting theClock for Systems with Automatic
Tone Control
AM-FM Stereo
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
3-15
3- 19
3-23
3-25
3-26
3-29
3-39
3-30
3-3 1
3-32
3-32
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic ToneControl (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Rear Seat Audio(If Equipped)
Remote CompactDisc Player (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature(If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips AboutYour Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Integrated Windshield Antenna
3-1
Temperature Knob
Comfort Controls
This section tells youhow to make your air system work The center knob controls the temperatureof the air
coming through thesystem. Turn it to the left (toward
for you. Your comfort control system uses
the blue area) for cooler air. Turn it to the right (toward
ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.
the red area)for warmer air.
With these systems,you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilationin your vehicle. Your vehicle
Mode Knob
also has a flow-through ventilation system described
This knob selects the directionof where the air will
later in this section.
enter the vehicle.
-be
fl
UPPER: This setting directs outside airthrough
the instrument panel outlets.
+e
+ f l BI-LEV: This setting directs outside air into your
vehicle in two ways. Cooler airis directed toward your
upper body through the front instrument panel outlets,
while warmed airis directed through the heater ducts at
your feet.
0
Fan Knob
The left knob is the fan knob and selects the force ofair
you want. Turn the knob to the right to increasefan speed
and to the left to decreasefan speed. Thefan must be
turned on for theair conditioning compressor to operate.
3-2
+fl
LOWER: This setting brings in mostof the air
through thefloor ducts. This setting is also used to send
air to the rearof the vehicle. Keep the area under the
front seats freeof objects that could obstruct airflow to
the rearof the vehicle.
w.
+#
DEFOG: This setting directs air tothe windshield
and through the floor ducts.This mode is particularly
useful during cold or inclement weather because of your
vehicle’s larger windshieldarea.
DEFROST: This setting directs mostof the airto
the windshieldand side window vents.
Mode Buttons
eRECIRC: Press this button (the light will glow)
to limit theamount of fresh air entering your vehicle by
recirculating muchof the air inside your vehicle.You
may use this setting to limitodors entering your vehicle.
Press the OUTSIDE AIR button (the light on the
RECIRC button will go off) to let outside air circulate
into the vehicle.
OUTSIDE AIR:Press this button (the light will
glow) to send outside air into your vehicle. Using this
setting while trying to defrost or defog the windows will
help clearthe vents of moisture. Press the RECIRC
button (the light on the OUTSIDE AIR button willgo
off) to limit outside air entering the vehicle. When the
DEFOG or DEFROST setting is selected,the system
will automaticallygo to OUTSIDE AIR mode.
Air Conditioning
On very hot days, your vehicle will cool down more
quickly andeconomically if you open the windows long
enough to let hot, inside air escape. For all settings,
adjust the temperature control knob and fan speed
as desired.
To get maximum cooling ora quick cool-down on very
hot days, press the A/C and RECIRC buttons (the lights
will glow) and turn the temperature knob to the left
(toward the blue area). Adjust the mode
knob to direct
the air tothe desired location.This setting should notbe
used for long periodsof time because the airmay
become too cold and dry. Push the
A/C button again (the
light willgo off) to turn off the air conditioning.
When the air conditioner compressor is on, you may
sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle’sengine
performance and power. This is normal. The systemis
designed to help fuel economy while it maintains the
desired cooling level.
The air conditioner removesmoisture from the air,so
you may sometimes notice water drippingfrom under
your vehicle’sengine compartment when it is idling or
after it has been turned off.This is normal.
3-3
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Turn the temperature knob to the right (toward the red
area) to warm the air.
To rapidly defrost the windshield, turn the
temperature
control knob all the way
to the right (to the red area) and
turn the mode knobto DEFROST.
In the LOWER mode, outsideair will be brought in and
sent through the floor outlets.
The heater works bestif
you keep your windows closed while using it.
The BI-LEV setting is designed for use on sunny days
when the air is only moderately warm or cool. days
On
like these, the sun may
adequately warm your upper
body, but your lower body may not be warm enough.
For the best results,turn the temperature control knob to
the middle position, and then adjust
it for comfort.
If you have the optionalengine coolant heater and use it
during cold weather,0°F (- 18 C) or lower, your heating
system will provide heat more quickly because the
engine coolant is already warmed.See “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index,
O
3-4
Adjust thefan to the highest speed.
To keep the windshield clear
and bring in heated air
through the heater ducts, turn the mode knob
to DEFOG.
When the temperature outside is
above freezing, the air
conditioner compressor willrun in these settings to help
remove moisturefrom the air.
Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger
vents located on the top
of the instrument panel. For
additional side window defogging, turn the mode
knob
to theBI-LEVEL setting and adjust thefan to the
highest speed.Aim the side vents on the instrument
panel toward theside windows. For increased airflow to
the side vents, close the center vents.
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Press REAR (the light will
glow) to warm thedefogger
grid on the rear window.
Do not attacha temporary vehicle license across the
defogger grid on the rear window.
1 NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade
or something else sharp
on the insideof the rear window.If’you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
The rear window defogger will turn off automatically
after about 10 minutes of use. If you turn it on again, the
defogger will operate for about five minutes. You can
also turn thedefogger off by turning off the ignition or
pressing the switch again.
3-5
Rear Climate Control(If Equipped)
Rear Fan Control
If you have the optional rear climate control, the rear
seat passengers can control the temperature and the
amount of air directedto the rearof the vehicle. The
amount of air directed tothe rear of the vehicle can also
be adjusted using the front control
for the rear fan.
This option comes with the rear climate controls.
Set the main climate control mode
knob to LOWER,
DEFOG or DEFROST, when outside temperatures are
cold or moderate, to send air to the of
rear
the vehicle
through the lower vents.
Set the main climate control mode knob UPPER
to
or
BI-LEV to send air tothe rear of the vehicle through the
headliner outlets.
To send conditioned air tothe rear of the vehicle, press
the A/Cbutton (the light will glow) on the main climate
controls. If you do not selectN C , air directed tothe rear
of the vehicle willbe cabin temperature.
Please keep the area around the base
of the center
instrument panelconsole and the area between and
under the front seatsfree of objects that would obstruct
airflow to the rear
of the vehicle.
':@
The rear fan control is
located below the
climate control system,
in the switchbank.
R
Turn the fan to the desired setting for the amount
of air
to be directed to the rear
of the vehicle.The temperature
of the air will be the same as the air in theoffront
the
vehicle. The rear fan control in the instrument panel
switchbank hasan R setting which allows the rear
passengers to use the rear climate control knobs to
adjust the air through the rear air outlets.
3-6
Rear Comfort Controls
Turn the temperature knob to the left(to the blue area)
The rear climate control knobs are in a panel next to the
second row seat. If your vehicle has the optional dual
sliding doors, thepanel is above the driver’s seat.
for cooler air, or tothe right (to the red area)for
warmer air.
To maintain acomfortable temperature in the rear, use
either rear fan control to adjust the force
of air coming
through the rear outlets.
Select the desired climate control
mode using the
directional controls on the instrument panel (see
“Mode
Knob” earlierin the section). The mode you choose will
regulate both the front and rear climate control systems.
3-7
Rear Air Vents
Ventilation System
To maximize airflow throughthe rear heater outlet,
place theleft bucket seat in the second row in the
forward position (see “Adjusting
Rear Seats” in
the Index).
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when the fan
is running.
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow
you to adjust the
direction and amountof airflow inside the vehicle. Push
the outletup or down to direct airflow to your
preference. Increase or reduce the amount
of airflow by
opening and closing the louvers. Opening
and closing
the louvers will also direct airflow
from side to side.
The air-flow through the ventscan be shutoff
completely by turning the thumb-wheel next to each
outlet all theway down. You can also stop outside air
from enteringby turning the fan toOFF and pushing the
RECIRC button.
The vent behind the left rear seat is the cold air return
vent. Be sure tokeep it free of obstructions.
Please keep the area around
the base of the center
instrument panelconsole and between and under the
front seatsfree of objects thatcould obstruct airflow to
the rear.
3-8
Ventilation Tips
0
Keep the hood andfront air inletfree of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves).This will
allow the heater and defroster to work much better,
reducing the chance of fogging the inside of
your windows.
a When you enter a vehicle in cold weather,
turn the
blower fan to “5” for a few moments before driving
off. This helps clear theintake ducts of snow and
moisture, andreduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
0
Keep the area aroundthe base of the center
instrument panel console and the air pathunder the
front seats clearof objects. This helps air to circulate
throughout your vehicle.
0
In cold weather, operatingthe system in the
OUTSIDE AIR mode willimprove the time it takes
to warm the vehicle.
Audio Systems
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed
to operate easily and give years
of listening pleasure.
You will get the mostenjoyment out of it if you acquaint
yourself withit first. Find out what your
Delco
Electronics system can do and how to operate allits
controls, to be sure you’re gettingthe most out of the
advanced engineering that went
into it.
Setting the Clockfor Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET.SET will appear on the displayfor five
seconds. Withinfive seconds, press and hold the right
arrow on the SEEK button until the correct minute
appears. Press and hold the
left arrow on the SEEK
button until the correcthour appears.
Setting the Clockfor Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears. Press
and holdMN until the correct minute appears.
3-9
AM-FM Stereo
2;
,
.
1
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press thelower knob to switch between
AM
and F M . The display showsyour selection.
TUNE: Turn the lowerknob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right or
left arrow to go to the next
higher orlower station and stay there.
SCAN: Press bothSEEK arrows; SCAN will appear on
the display. Use SCAN to listen to stations
for a few
seconds. The radio willgo to a station, stop for a few
seconds, thengo on to the next station.The radio will
scan up or down the radio band, depending on the arrow
you pressed first. Press bothSEEK arrows or the upper
Playing the Radio
knob to stop scanning.
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and
off and
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttonslet
controls the volume.To increase volume and turn the
you return to your favorite stations.
You can set up to
radio on, turnthe knob to the right. Turn
it to the left to
14 stations (sevenAM and sevenFM). Just:
decrease volume and turn the radio off.
1. Turn the radio on.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition
off by
pressing theRECALL knob. When the radio is playing, 2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
press this button to recall the station frequency.
3. Tune in the desired station.
3-10
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press and hold one of the four numbered buttons,
within five seconds. The sound will mute. When it
returns, release the button. Whenever you press that
numbered button,the station youset will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition tothe four stations alreadyset, up to three
more stations maybe preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at thesame time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same
time, within five seconds. The sound will mute.
When it returns, release the buttons.Whenever
you press the same buttons, the station you set
will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide the leverup or down to increase or
decrease treble.If a station is weak or noisy,
you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behindthe upper knob to move
the sound to theleft or right speakers.The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind thelower knob to move
the sound to the front or
rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between
the speakers.
3-11
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player
(If Equipped)
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knobto switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2.The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right or leftarrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
2 1 stations (sevenAM, seven F M 1 , and seven F"2 ). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
Playing the Radio
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
5. Press one of the four numbered buttons, within five
controls the volume.To increase volume and turn the
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button,
radio on, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to theto left
the station you set will return.
decrease volume and turn the radio off.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off
by
pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio is playing,
press this buttonto recall the station frequency.
3-12
In addition to thefour stations already set, up to three
more stations maybe preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at thesame time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same
time, within five seconds. The sound will mute.
When it returns, releasethe buttons. Whenever you
press the same buttons, the station you set
will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
P.SCAN: Press both SEEK arrows and P.SCAN will
appear on the display. Use P.SCAN to listen to
each of
your preset stationsfor a few seconds. The radio will go
to thefirst preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for a few seconds, thengo on to the next preset
station. (If a preset station has weak reception, it will not
stop.) Presseither SEEK arrow or the upper knob to
stop scanning.
Setting theTone
BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide the lever up or down
to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upperknob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers.
The middle
position balancesthe sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behindthe lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers.
The middle
position balances thesound between the speakers.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape playeris built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long oneach side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
If you hear nothing or hear
just a garbled sound, itmay
not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and
start over.
3-13
While the tape is playing, use theVOL, FADE, BAL,
BASS and TREB controlsjust asyou do for the radio.
Other controlsmay have different functions when a tape
is inserted. The display will showan arrow to show
which side of the tapeis playing.
REV: Press the SEEK arrow pointing to the left and
the tapewill reverse rapidly untilyou press this button
again lightly.
FWD: Press theSEEK arrow pointing tothe right and
the tape will rapidly advance until you press this button
again lightly.
RECALL: Press this knob to hear the other side
of a
tape that is playing.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape.
The radio
will play. If you leave a cassette tapein the player while
listening to the radio, may
it become warm.
CLN: If this messageappears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs be
to cleaned. It willstill play
tapes, butyou should clean itas soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player.
See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT
for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display
--- to
show the indicatorwas reset.
3-14
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to useCD
a adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypassfeature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio on.
3. Insert the adapter.
4. Within five seconds, press and hold theREV and
FWD buttons at the same time
for three seconds.The
tape symbol on the display will flash, showing that
the cut tape detection
feature is no longer active.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player
and AutomaticTone Control (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn theknob to the right. Turn
it to the left to decrease volume.
The knob is capable of
rotating continuously.
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you press the button whenthe ignition is off,
the clock will showfor a few seconds.
S C V Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road
and wind noiseas you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed.
The volume
level should always sound the same to you
as you drive.
If you don’t wantto use SCV,turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between
AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into
its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow go
to to
the next higher or lower station. The sound will mute
while seeking.
3-15
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN will appear in the display. Use SCAN
to
listen to stationsfor a few seconds.The radio willgo to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then
go on to the next
station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning.The sound
will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, sixFMl and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that
best suits the typeof station selected.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The
sound will mute. Whenit returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-16
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen
to each of your
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. The radio will scan through each
of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting storedfor
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
PSCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner
is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number(Pl-P6)
will appear momentarilyjust before the frequencyis
displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through
both FM1 and FM2 preset stations and
FM1 or FM2 will
appear on the display.
Setting theTone
BASS: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turnthe
knob to the right to increase bass and
to the left to
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio's
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display willgo blank.
TREB: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase treble and to the leftto
decrease treble. Whenyou use this control, the radio's
AUTO TONE setting will switchto manual and the
AUTO TONE display willgo blank. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when Playing a Cassette Tape
you’re not using them.
Your tape playeris built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on eachside. Tapes longer than
AUTO TONE: This feature allows youto choose preset
that are so thin they may not work well in this player. If
bass and treble equalization settings designed for
a tapeis inserted when the ignitionis on but the radio is
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and
jazz
A symbol is shown
stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first off, the tape will begin playing. tape
in the centerof the graphic display whenever a tape is
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another
inserted. When a tape is active, the tape symbol will be
setting will appearon the display. Pressit again after
accompanied by a direction arrow.
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display willgo
blank. Tone control will return
to the BASS and TREB
While the tape is playing, use theVOL, AUTO TONE,
knobs. Also, ifyou use the BASS and TREB knobs,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls
just as you do
control will returnto them and the AUTO TONE
for the radio. Other controls may have different
display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
functions when a tapeis inserted. The display will show
AUTO TONE.
the tape symbol and an arrow to show which side
of the
Adjusting the Speakers
tape is playing.
BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the rightfor the right speakers and to the leftfor
the left speakers. The middle position balances the
sound betweenthe speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to adjust the soundto the front
speakers andto the left for the rear speakers.The middle
position balances the sound between
the speakers.
Push theseknobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
If you hear nothingor hear just a garbled sound,it may
not be in squarely. Press EJECTto remove the tape and
start over.
The player is able to detect a tight or broken tape, and
will eject the tape.The radio will go back to playing the
last station selected.
The player automatically senses the cassette
for metal or
CrO2 and setsthe pre-emphasis. Anytime a tapeis
inserted, the top side is selectedto play first.
3-17
PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow togo
00 (5): Press this button to reduce background noise.
to the previous selection onthe tape if the current selection Note that the double-D symbol wdl appearon the display.
has been playing for less than eight seconds.
If the PREV
Dolby Noise Reductionis manufactured undera license
button is pressed and the current selection has been
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
playing for more than eight seconds, it willgo to the
and the double-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby
beginning of the current selection.Your tape must have at
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
least three secondsof silence between each selection for
FWD (6): Press this buttonto advance quickly to
PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction arrow blinks
another partof the tape. Press the button again to return
during PREV or SEEK operation. The sound will mute
to
playing speed. The radio will play
the last-selected
during PREV or SEEK operation. Press this button or one
station while the tape advances.
of the SEEK arrows again to return to normal play.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio
when a tape
PROG (2): Press this button to play the other side
of
is in the player.
the tape.
NEXT (3): Press this buttonor the right SEEK arrow to TAPE AUX: Press this buttonto change to the tape
function when the radio is on.The tape symbol withan
go to the next selection on the tape.
If you hold the
arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active.
button or press it more than once, the player will
If your system is equipped with a remote playback
continue moving forwardthrough the tape.Your tape
device,
pressing this buttona second time will allow the
must have at least threeseconds of silence between each
remote device to play.
selection forNEXT or SEEK to work.The tape
direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation. EJECT Press this button to remove the tape.
The radio
The sound will mute during NEXTor SEEK operation.
will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
Press this button orone of the SEEKarrows again to
ignition or radio off. Cassettes
may be loaded withthe
return to normal play.
radio off if this button is pressed first.If you leave a
REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. cassette tapein the player while listening to the radio, it
may become warm.
Press it again to return to playing speed.
The radio will
play the last-selected station while the tape reverses.
3-18
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
tapes, but you should cleanit as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player.
See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player”in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold
EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display--- to
show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use
a CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypassfeature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN orACCESSORY.
Playing the Radio
2. Turn the radio off.
PWR-VOL: Press this knob toturn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn
it to the left to decrease volume.
The knob is capable of
rotating continuously.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button
for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating thefeature is active.
4. Insert the adapter. It willpower up the radio and
begin playing.
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you press the buttonwhen the ignition is off,
the clock will show fora few seconds.
This override routine willremain active until EJECT
is pressed.
3-19
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). WithSCV, your
audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road
and wind noiseas you drive. Set the volumeat the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust
the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noiseat any particular speed.The volume
level should always sound the same
to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to useSCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows
for
more volume compensationat faster vehicle speeds.
SCAN: Press oneof the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN will appearon the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stationsfor a few seconds. The radio willgo to
a station, stopfor a few seconds, then goon to the next
station. PressSEEK again to stop scanning. The sound
will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.
You can set up to
18 stations (sixAM, six FM1 and six FMZ). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
Finding a Station
3. Tune in the desired station.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between
AM, F M 1
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
best suits the typeof station selected.
TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to
5. Press and hold oneof the six numbered buttons. The
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
position when you’re not using it.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and
the AUTO TONE
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow go
to to
equalization thatyou selected will alsobe
the next higher or lower station.
The sound will mute
automatically selected for that button.
while seeking.
6. Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton.
3-20
-
P.SCAN: Press this buttonto listen to each of your
favorite stations storedon your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting storedfor
that pushbutton willbe automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed wheneverthe tuner
is in the P.SCAN mode.The channel number (Pl-P6)
will appear momentarilyjust before the frequency is
displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through
both FM1 and FM2 preset stations andFMl or FM2 will
appear on the display.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the rightto increase bass and to the left to
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manualand the
AUTO TONE display willgo blank.
TREB: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turnthe
knob to the rightto increase treble andto the left to
decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display willgo blank. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may wantto decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed
for
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and
jazz
stations. C/W will appear onthe display whenyou first
press AUTO TONE. Each time you pressit, another
setting will appearon the display. Press it again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display will go
blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, if you use the BASS andTREB knobs,
control will return to them and the AUTO
TONE
display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONSto program
AUTO TONE.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob tothe right for the right speakers andto the left for
the left speakers. The middle position balances the
sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob tothe right to adjust the sound tothe front
speakers and to the left
for the rear speakers.The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push theseknobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
RDM (2): Press this buttonto hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will show
on
Insert adisc partway into the slot, label sideup. The
the display. PressRDM again to turn off random play.
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing.The
RDM is reset tooff when the discis ejected.
display will show CD and the CD symbol.
If you want
to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press NEXT (3): Press this buttonor the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next track.
If you holdthe button or press it
RECALL or EJECT.
more than once, the player will continue moving
If you’re drivingon a very rough road orif it’s very hot,
forward through the disc.The sound will mute
the disc may not play and ERR
(error) may appear on
Playing a CompactDisc
the display. Press RECALL to take ERR
off the display.
When things get back to normal, the disc should play.
If
the disc comesout, it couldbe that:
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
PREV (1): Press this buttonor the left SEEK arrow to
go to the previous trackif the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing
for
more thaneight seconds, it willgo to the beginningof
the current selection.If you hold the buttonor press it
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc.The sound will mute while seeking.
3-22
while seeking.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. Release to
it play the passage.You can
use the counter reading on the display to locate a
passage more easily.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance
quickly within a track. Release
it to resume playing.You
can use the counter readingon the display to locate a
passage easily.
RECALL: Press this buttonto see which track is
playing. Press it again within
five seconds to see how
long it has been playing (elapsed time).
The track
number also appears when you change the volume
or
when a new track startsto play.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the
radio when a disc
is in the player.The letters CD will go off the display.
CD AUX: Press this buttonto change to the disc
function when the radiois on. A CD icon will appear on
the display when the discis in the player, whetherit is
active or not. If your systemis equipped with a remote
playback device, pressing this button a second
time will
allow the remote device to play.
EJECT Press this buttonto remove the disc.The radio
will play. The disc will start at the first track when
you
reinsert it.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a discin the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system, the disc will start playing whereit
was stopped.If you press EJECT but don’t remove
the disc,the player will pullthe disc back in to protectit
after aboutone minute. If you leave a compact disc
in the player while listening to the radio,
it may
become warm.
Rear Seat Audio (If Equipped)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen
to a
different music source than the front seat passengers
including AM-FM automatic tone control,
cassette tapes
or CDs. For example, rear seat passengers may listen
to
a cassette tapeor CD through headphones while the
driver listens to the radio through the front speakers.
The rear seat passengers have control
of the volumefor
each headphone.Be aware thatthe front seat audio
controls always override the rear seat
audio controls.
Note that this featureis intended for rear
seat passengers.
3-23
PWR: Press this button to turn the rear seat audio system
If your vehicle is equipped with theAM-FMStereo with
on or off. The rear speakers will be muted when the power Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control or the
is turned on. You may operate the rear seat audio functions Remote Compact Disc Player, while listening ato
even when the primary radio power isoff.
compact disc, pressthe up arrow to hear the next
arrow to
selection on the compact disc. Press the down
VOL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
go back to the previous selection.
The SEEK buttonis
knob to the rightto increase volume andto the leftto
inactive
if
the
CD
mode
on
the
front
radio isin use.
decrease volume. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you're not using
it. The upper VOL knob
P.SET PROG: The front passengers mustbe listening
controls the upper headphone and the lower
VOL knob
to something differentfor each of these functions
to work:
controls the lower headphone.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1
Press this button to seek through your preset radio
and FM2. If the frontpassengers are already listening to
stations set on your primary radio pushbuttons.
AM-FM, the rear seataudio controller will not switch
When a cassette tapeis playing, press this buttonto
between the bands and
cannot change the frequency.
go to the other sideof the tape.
SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next higher
TAPE CD: With a cassette tape in the player and the
station and stay there. Press the down arrow to tune to radio playing, press this button
to play a cassette tape.
the nextlower station and stay there.The sound will
Press TAPE CD toswitch between the tape and compact
mute while seeking.The SEEK button is inactiveif the
disc if both are loaded. Press AM-FM to return to the
AM-FM mode on the front radio is in use.
radio when a cassette tape or compact disc is playing.
If your vehicleis equipped withthe AM-FM Stereo with The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside
the
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control, while radio for future listening.
listening to a cassette tape, press the up arrow to hear the
next selection onthe tape. Press the down arrow go
to
back to the previous selection.The SEEK button is
inactive if the cassette modeon the front radio is in use.
3-24
A disc that has been ejected butis still sitting in the
remote CD player will be pulled back
into the player
after approximately30 seconds. This protectsthe disc
and playerfrom damage. The disc will not start playing.
To remove the disc, press the
EJECT button and remove
the discfrom the player.
If you have this option, you can play up
to one compact
disc (CD) at a time.
To load a CD into the player, hold thedisc with the label
side up and insertit carefully into the player
(approximately half way).The disc will automatically
be pulled into the player. If the radio isoff and the
ignition is on when a CD is inserted, theradio will turn
on and begin playing theCD. It is possible to load and
unload CDs with the ignitionoff. To load a disc with the
ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote
player and then insertthe disc. To remove thedisc, press
the EJECT button and remove the
disc from the player.
All of the compact disc functions are controlled the
by
radio buttons exceptfor EJECT. When a discis in the
player, a CD symbol will appearon the display. When a
disc is playing, the lettersCD will appear nextto the CD
symbol in the bottom left corner.The track number will
also be displayed.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears
on the
display, it could be that:
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an
hour and try again.)
You are driving on a very rough road.
Please contact your dealershipif any error recurs or
cannot be corrected.
3-25
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
PREV (1): Press this button togo back to the
start of the current trackif more than eight seconds have currently playing. PressRECALL again withinfive
played. Press PREV again to go
to the previous track on
the disc.
NEXT (3): Press this button toadvance to the next track
on the disc.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track.As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be
displayed to help you
find the correct passage.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. As theCD advances, elapsedtime will be
displayed to helpyou find the correct passage.
SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CDgoto
back to the start of the current track.It will go back to
the current trackif more than eight seconds have played.
Press the left arrow again
to go to previous tracks. Press
the right arrow togo to the next higher track on the disc.
RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enter the random play
mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in
this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in
random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT
while in the random mode, the PREV or NEXT track
will be scanned randomly. Press
P.SCAN again to turn
off RANDOM and return to normal operation.
3-26
seconds tosee how long the track has been playing.
When a new track starts to play, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time
of
day will be displayed.
TAPE AUX:With a disc loaded in the player and the
radio playing, press this button
once to play the compact
disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM.
If
both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press
TAPE
AUX to switch between the tape and compact disc.
EJECT Press this button on the
remote player to ejecta
compact disc.
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
THEFTLOCK@ is designed discourage
to
theft of your
radio. It works by using a secretcode to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
Your
audio system is equipped with THEFTLOCK
if
THEFTLOCK is displayed on the front
of the radio.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radiomay be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protectedby the feature.If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display 6 . Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with yourcode.
LOC to indicate alocked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted.If your battery loses power
7. Press HR to make thefirst one or two digits agree
for any reason, you mustunlock the radio withthe secret
with your code.
code before it will operate.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
code matches the secretcode you have writtendown.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
The instructions whichfollow explain howto enter your
need to repeat Steps5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
secret code.
recommended that you readthrough all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.
The
NOTE: If you allow more than15 seconds to elapse
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
when the ignition is turned off.
time and you must startthe procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it ina safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
3. Turn the radio off.
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
Enter your secretcode as follows; pauseno more than
15 seconds between steps:
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the 3. Press MN again to make the lasttwo digits agree
secret code number which you have writtendown.
with your code.
5. Press MN and000 will appear on the display.
4. Press HR to make thefirst one or two digits agree
with your code.
3-27
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secretcode you have writtendown.
The display will showSEC, indicating the radiois
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrongcode eight times, INOP will
appear on the display.You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again,you will onlyhave three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as
follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY orRUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3-28
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after youhave confirmed that the
code matches the secretcode you have written down.
The display will show---,indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect,
SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied
to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on LOC
and will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio,
see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power
Loss” earlier in
this section.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater thanfor FM,
especially at night.The longer range, however,can
cause stations to interfere witheach other. AM can pick
up noise from things likestorms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble toreduce this noiseif you ever getit.
To help avoid hearing lossor damage:
0
Adjust the volume control to thelowest setting.
0
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
I
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but
FM signals
will reach onlyabout 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with
FM signals, causing
the sound tocome and go.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise isalmost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound thatseems normal canbe loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions
by
adjusting the volume control on your radio toa safe
sound level before your hearing adapts it.
to
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can
add whatyou want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it
properly. Added sound
of
equipment may interfere with the operation
your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment thathas been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer andbe sure tocheck Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
--
--
3-29
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes aordamaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat.If they aren’t, theymay not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player shouldbe cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player
for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer.
If this message appearson
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage toyour tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to seeif it is the tape or the tape
player atfault. If this other cassette hasno improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method
for your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs
of the cleaner cassetteturn.
The recommended cleaning cassetteis available through
your dealership(GM Part No. 12344789).
3-30
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equippedwith a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassettemay appear asa broken tape. To
prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected,
use the
following steps.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio on.
3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
4. Within five seconds, press and hold theREV and
FWD buttons at the same timefor three seconds. The
tape symbolon the display willflash, showing that
the cut tape detection featureis no longer active.
5 . Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
If your vehicle isequipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player andAutomatic Tone Control:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT
for
five seconds to resetthe CLN indicator.The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make surethe cassette
tape isin good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
3. Press and hold the TAPEAUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds.
Care of Your Compact Discs
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
Handle discs carefully.Store them in their original cases
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
or other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight
recommended cleaning time.
and dust.If the surfaceof a discis soiled, dampen a
clean,
soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solution and
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
detection feature is active again.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outeredges or the
cleaner which uses a cassette withfabric
a belt to clean
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on itsown. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as thescrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
3-31
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Integrated Windshield Antenna
The use of CD lens cleaner discsis not advised,due to
the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with
lubricants internal tothe CD mechanism.
The antenna in your vehicle aisvery thin, metallayer in
the windshield.If you look near theedges of the
windshield, you cansee the outlineof the antenna.The
connector is at the topof the windshield, wherethe
headliner ends.
If you experience difficulty withremote transmitters,
such as a garage door opener,
try pointing the device
through thevery top of the windshield.
3-32
@% NOTES
6 NOTES
3-34
0Section 4
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about drivingon different kindsof roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included manyother useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-1 1
4-13
4-13
4- 15
4- 16
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
4-18
4-2 1
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-26
4-30
4-33
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Defensive driving really means “be ready
for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads
or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
to be
Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable
of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance.It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving.
You never
know when the vehicle front
in of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task -- such as concentrating on a cellular telephone
call, reading,or reaching for something on the
floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult
Defensive Driving
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
The best advice anyone canFive about driving is:
Ask a passengerto help do thingslike this, or pulloff
Drive defensively.
the road ina safe placeto do them yourself. These
simple defensive driving techniques could save
Please start with avery important safety device in your
Chevrolet: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) your life.
4-2
The obvious way to solve this highway safety
problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is what if peopledo? How much is “toomuch” if the
a national tragedy. It’s the number
one contributor to
driver plans to drive? It’s
a lot less than many might
the highwaydeath toll, claiming thousands of victims
think. Althoughit depends on each person and situation,
every year.
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
The Blood AlcoholConcentration (BAC) of someone
a vehicle:
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Judgment
0 The amount of alcohol consumed
Drunken Driving
Muscular Coordination
0
The drinker’s body weight
Vision
0
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
Attentiveness.
Police records show thatalmost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In
most cases,
these deaths are the resultof someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol,so
they neverdrive after drinking.For persons under21,
it’s against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According tothe American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three12-ounce
(355 ml) bottlesof beer in an hour will end up with
a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the
same BACby drinking three4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinksif each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
BAC level than a
woman generally will reach a higher
man of her same body weight when each has the
same
number of drinks.
The law in manyU.S. states sets the legal limit aatBAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number
of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is
0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower.
The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
:
,
:.. . . .:
.
..
.
The BAC willbe over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (inone hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of
0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skillsof
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects
are worse at night. All
It’s the amountof alcohol that counts. For example,
if
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent.
the same person drank three
double martinis (3 ounces
Statistics show that the
chance of being in a collision
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
increases sharplyfor drivers who have BAC
a
of
BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who
of
consumes foodjust before orduring drinking will have a 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a
somewhat lower BAC level.
collision. At a BAC level
of 0.10 percent, thechance of
There is a gender difference, too.Women generally have
this driver having a collision
is 12 times greater;at a
a lower relative percentage
of body water than men.
level of 0.15 percent, thechance is 25 times greater!
4-4
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink.No amount of coffee or numberof cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. Whatif there’s an emergency, a need to
is very dangerous.
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? Drinking and then driving
Your reflexes,perceptions, attentivenessand
A person with even a moderate
BAC might not be able
judgment can beaffected by evena small amount
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
many people don’tknow. Medical research shows that
Please don’t drink and drive or ride
with a driver
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
who has been drinking. Ridehome in a cab; or if
worse, especially injuriesto the brain, spinal cord or
you’re with a group, designate adriver who will
heart. This means that when anyone who
has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
not drink.
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.
I
--
--
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
Braking action involvesperceprlon time and
reaction time.
you want it: to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have todo their work
at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s
reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average.It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But evenin 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot
of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distancesvary greatly
with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the conditionof the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the conditionof your brakes;the weight of the
vehicle and the amountof brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re drivingon snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide, That means you lose
can control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking.Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather thankeeping pace with traffic.This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out muchfaster if you
do a lotof heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lotof unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops whileyou’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pumpyour brakes. If you do, the
pedal may getharder to pushdown. If your engine
stops, you willstill have some powerbrake assist. But
you willuse it when you brake.Once the power assistis
used up,it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
I
- .Lock P ‘;es (ABS)
rour vehicle has anti-lock brakes(ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you begin
to drive
away, your anti-lockbrake system will check itself.You
may hear a momentarymotor or clicking noisewhile
this test is goingon, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little.(You may also hear a clicking
noise if you leave the ignition in the
RUN position for
about four seconds before starting the vehicle.)This
is normal.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stayon or
flash. See “Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster
than any driver could. The computer is programmedto
make the most of availabletire and road conditions.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road
is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal
jumps out in
front of you.
A computer senses that wheels
are slowing down.If one
of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’tchange the time you need
to get your footup to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance.If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave
enough room up aheadto stop, even though youhave
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes.Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation or notice
some noise, but
this is normal.
LOW
TRACTION
If your vehiclehas the
traction control system, this
light will come on when
your anti-lock system is
adjusting brake pressure to
help avoid a braking skid.
See “Low Traction Light” in the Index.
Traction Control System(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin.This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions.The system operates onlyif it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinningor
beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the
system worksthe front brakes andreduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
’
LOW
TRACTION
This light will comeon
when the traction control
system is limiting wheel
spin. See “Low Traction
Light” in the Index.
You may feel or hear the system
working, but this
is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control systembegins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control.(See “Cruise Control”
in the Index.)
4-9
This light shouldcome
on briefly when youstart
#- -\
the engine.If it stays
on or comes on while you
:TCS:
1
0
are driving, there’s a
problem with your traction
d
control system.
See “Traction ControlSystem Warning Light” in the
is on, the system will not
Index. When this warning light
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes
on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you
can turn the
traction control systemoff if youever need to. (You
should turn the system
off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud, iceor snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
7
C
C
C
To turn the systemoff, press
the TCS symbol on the
bottom of the buttonin the
center console switchbank.
The indicator light on the
traction control button will
go off.
(
L
If the systemis limiting wheel spin when you press the
button, the indicator light will go off, but the system will
not turnoff until thereis no longer a current need to
limit wheel spin.You can turn the system backon at any
time by pressing the button again.The traction control
system warning light should
go off.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steeringcan help you more
than even the very best braking.
4-10
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist
because the engine
stops or thesystem is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do theirwork where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens?Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curveswarn that you should
adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speeds are
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less
favorable
conditions
you’ll
want
to
go
slower.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happenon curves. Here’s why:
If you need to reduce your speedas you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your
front
Experienced driver or beginner, eachof us is subject to
wheels are straight ahead.
the same lawsof physics when driving on curves.The
traction of the tires againstthe road surface makes it
Try to adjust your speedso you can “drive” through the
possible for the vehicle tochange its path when youturn
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to
the front wheels.If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
accelerate until you are out
of the curve, and then
the vehiclegoing in the same direction. If
you’ve ever
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
tried to steer a vehicle on wet
ice, you’ll understand this.
Driving on Curves
The traction you can get ina curve dependson the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curveis banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
4-11
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering canbe more effective
than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, aorcar suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child
darts out from between
parked cars and stops right
in front of you. You can
avoid these problems bybraking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the timefor evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speedas you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision.If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan
turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. Butyou have to actfast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once
you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicleabout to pass anotheron a
two-lane highway waitsfor just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again.A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily!Passing another vehicleon a two-lane
highway is a potentiallydangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane asoncoming
traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or
anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents-- the head-on collision.
So here are some tipsfor passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sidesand to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
If the levelof the shoulder isonly slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can seea sign up ahead that might indicatea
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicates it’sall right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never
cross a solid
line on your sideof the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems emptyof approaching traf3c.
4-13
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass whde you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slowsor stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to passis coming up,
start to accelerate but stayin the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your moveso you will be
increasing speed as the time comesto move into the
other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you wouldlose by dropping back. Andif
something happens to cause you
to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
0
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull outto pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
4-14
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you
are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle
to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirroris convex. The vehicleyou
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
0
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lampsare not flashing, it may
be slowing downor starting to turn.
0
If you’re being passed, makeit easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the rieht.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say
about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’thave enough friction where the
tires meet the road todo what thedriver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or areaof less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control
of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three typesof skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In thebraking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. Inthe steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causesthe driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easingyour foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the
vehicle to go.If you start steering quicklyenough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Alwaysbe ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try
your best to avoidsudden steering, acceleration or
braking (includingengine braking by shifting to alower
gear). Any suddenchanges could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realizethe surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learnto recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a“mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when youhave any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lockbrake system ( A B S )helps
avoid only the brakingskid.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired
-- by
alcohol ordrugs, with night vision problems, orby fatigue.
4-16
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drive defensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
0
Adjust your inside rearview
mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
0
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
0
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your
headlamps can lightup only so much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watchfor animals.
0
If you’re tired, pulloff the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as
we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old
driver may require at leasttwice as much light tosee the
same thing at night asa 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjustingto night. Butif you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night.
They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also makea lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded byapproaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out.Glare at nightis made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the insideof the glass
can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up
far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; thatway, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes
be examined regularly.Some drivers sufferfrom night
blindness -- the inability tosee in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
4-17
Rain and wet roadscan mean driving trouble.On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’tas good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise go
to slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
Driving in Rainand on Wet Roads
--I
4-18
!
The heavier the rain, the harder
it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper bladesare in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, theedge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips
of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
A CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Driving toofast through large water puddles or even
going throughsome car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t,try to slow down beforeyou hit them.
4-19
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
can actually ride on the water.
under your tires that they
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle
is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
I
I
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody
of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But
it can if your
tires do not have much tread or
if the pressurein one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing
on
the road.If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could
be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The
best advice is to slow down when
it is raining.
NOTICE:
I
I
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful whenyou pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-20
I
City Driving
Here are waysto increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map
and plan your tripinto an
unknown partof the cityjust as you wouldfor a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’llsave time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
0
Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic
light is there because the corneris busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green,and just before you
start to move, check both waysfor vehicles that have
not cleared the intersectionor may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets
is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll wantto watch out for
what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-21
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, thereis usually a ramp that leadsto the
freeway. If you have a clear view ofthe freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the
gap at closeto
the prevailing speed. Switchon your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often
as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s
slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then
use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expectto move
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, slightly slower at night.
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
When you want to leave the freeway, moveto the proper
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not,
The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive
at the same
the next exit.
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-22
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some thingsyou can check before a trip:
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After drivingfor any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend
to think you are going
slower thanyou actually are.
0
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
0
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
0
Lamps: Are they allworking? Are the lenses clean?
0
Tires: They are vitallyimportant to a safe,
Before Leaving ona Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested.
If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many
miles that first part
of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing andshoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle readyfor a longtrip? If you keepit
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go.
If it needs
service, have it done before starting out.Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service expertsin
Chevrolet dealerships all across NorthAmerica. They’ll
be ready and willing to help
if you need it.
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
0
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route?Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major
storm system?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-23
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
happen toyou! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can youdo about highway hypnosis? First,
be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicleis well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take
a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
4-24
Driving on steep hills or mountainsis different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here aresome tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0
0
Keep your vehicle in good sk -le.Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
~
Joasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking oreven none goingdown a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let yourengine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gearwhen you go
down a steep or longhill.
,ACAUTION:
0
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
If you don’t shiftdown, your brakescould
get so hot that theywouldn’t work well. You
would then have poor brakingor even none going
down a hill. You could crash.Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes aonsteep
downhill slope.
0
Stay in your own lane when driving on
two-lane
roads in hills ormountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the centerof the road.Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
0
As you go over the topof a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car an
oraccident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems.Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
0
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a
piece of old carpet or a couple
of burlap bagsto help
provide traction. Be sureyou properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road,you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need
to be
very careful.
Here are some tipsfor winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-26
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow orice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet
ice can be even more troublebecause it may offer the
least tractionof all. You can get wetice when it’sabout
freezing (32°F; O O C) and freezing rain begins to
fall.
Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
If you have traction control, keep the system It
on.will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. Eventhough your vehicle has a traction
control system, you’ll want to
slow down and adjust
your driving to the road conditions,
See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.
If you don’t have traction control, accelerate gently. Try
not to break the gentle traction.
If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin
and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
4-27
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you havean anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stoppingsooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock‘’ in the Index.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
0
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice.On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches
may appear in
shaded areas wherethe sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildingsor under bridges.
Sometimes the surfaceof a curve oran overpass may
remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.If
you see a patchof ice aheadof you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stoppedby heavy snow, you could be ina
serious situation.You should probably stay with your
vehicle unlessyou know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things todo to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
0
4-28
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie a red clothto your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourselfor
tuck underyour clothing tokeep warm.
Snow cantrap exhaustgases under yourvehicle.
This can cause deadly
CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside.CO could overcomeyou and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from
around the baseof your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaustpipe. And check
to time to be sure
snow
around again from time
doesn’t collect there.
of the
Open a window just a little on the side
vehicle that’s away from the
wind. This will help
keep CO out.
You can run the engine tokeep warm,but be careful.
4-29
Run your engine only as long
as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make
it goa little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.This
uses less fuelfor the heat that you get and
it keeps the
battery charged.You will need a well-charged batteryto
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps.Let the heater runfor a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the wayto preserve theheat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do itas little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm,you can get
out of the vehicle anddo some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Loading Your Vehicle
COLD TIRE PRESSURE
0 0
0 0
o n
The Certificationire label is found on the rearedge of
the driver’s door.
The label shows the sizeof your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. Thisis called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
4-30
The Certificatioflire label alsotells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called the
Gross
Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out the actual
loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle.
Your dealer can
help you with this.Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
A
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
CAJTION:
I NOTICE:
Your warranty does not coverparts or
components that fail
because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages or anythingelse -- they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes.If you have to stopor turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
m -
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, or it can change the
way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control.
Also, overloading can shorten the
life of
your vehicle.
4-31
people inside as part
of your load.If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the
factory, remember to subtract the weight
of these things
from the payload.You should never exceed the
GVWR
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
or theGAWR. Your dealer can help you determine
and injurepeople in a sudden stop or turn, or in your payload.
a crash.
Electronic Level Control (Option)
0 Put thingsin the cargo areaof your vehicle.
On vehicles equipped with the optional electronic level
Try to spread the
weight evenly.
control, the rearof the vehicleis automatically kept
0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
level asyou load or unload your vehicle. However, you
inside thevehicle so that some of them are
should still not exceed the
GVWR or theG A M .
above the topsof the seats.
You may hear the compressor operating when you load
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
or unload your vehicle, and periodically as the system
your vehicle.
self-adjusts. This is normal.
0 When you carry somethinginside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
The compressor should operate
for brief periodsof time.
0 Don’t leave a seat folded down unlessyou
If the sound continues for an extended period
of time,
your vehicle needs service.
To keep your batteryfrom
need to.
being drained, youmay want to remove the ELC
fuse in
the fuse control panel untilyou can get your vehicle
Payload (Cargo Van Only)
serviced (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
The payload capacity is shown
on the Certificatioflire
Using heavier suspension components to get added
label. This is the maximum load capacity that your
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the weight
of the
your dealer to help
you load your vehicle the right
way.
4-32
Towing a Trailer
A CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control whenyou pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the
brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You
and your passengers could
be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
Ask your dealer for advice
steps in this section.
and informatinn about
towing a trailer with
your vehicl-
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result incostly repairs notcovered by
your warranty.To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in thispart, and see your dealer for
important information abouttowing atrailer
with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer.
To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity isfor your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight
of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. But trailering
is
different thanjust driving your vehicle by
itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, andit has to be used properly.
That’s the reasonfor this section. Init are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are importantfor your safety and thatof
your passengers.So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components suchas the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight.The engine is
required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
4-33
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, hereare some important points:
e There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having todo with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving.A good sourcefor this
information can be state or provincial police.
0 Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should always
use a sway control
if your trailer will weigh more
than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer
about sway controls.
0 Don’t tow a trailer
at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km)your new vehicleis driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
0 Then, during the first
500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over
50 mph (80 kmh) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts
of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
0 You should use THIRD(3) (or, as you need to, a
lower gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your
vehicle in THIRD(3) when towing a trailer will
minimize heat buildup and extend the
life of
your transaxle.
4-34
do with weight:
Three important considerations have to
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
0
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavycan a trailer safelybe?
It should never weigh more than
1,400 lbs. (630 kg)
with upto six occupants or more than2,000 lbs.
(900 kg) with up to two occupants. If you have
the
optional trailer towing package, your vehicle can tow up
to 2,900 lbs. (1 300 kg) with upto six occupants or up to
3,500 lbs. (1 575 kg) with up to two occupants. But even
that can be tooheavy.
It depends on how you plan
to use your rig.For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And,it can also depend on any
special equipment that you
have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealerfor our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Department
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
A
B
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle.The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and thepeople who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add thetongue load to theGVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Indexfor more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If you’re using aweight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately,to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may beable to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-35
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certificatioflire label at the rearedge of the driver’s
door or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure
you don’t go over the GVWlimit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important tohave the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucksgoing by and rough roadsare a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
The bumpers on your vehicle are not intendedfor
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a
frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to
the bumper.
4-36
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to use a
properly mounted, weight-carrying hitch and sway
control of the proper size.This equipment isvery
important for proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.
Will you have to make any holesin the body ofyour
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, thenbe sure to sealthe holes later when
you remove the hitch.If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide(CO) from your exhaustcan get
into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index). Dirt and watercan, too.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains betweenyour vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains
under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue wdl not drop to the road
if it becomes separatedfrom the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains anddo not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slackso you can turn with yourrig.
And, never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighsmore than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they mustbe
adequate. Be sure to read andfollow the instructionsfor
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into
your vehicle’sbrake system. If you do, both brake
systems won’t work well, orat all.
Driving with a Trailer
A CAUTION:
If you have a rearmost window open andyou
pull a trailer with your
vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) couldcome into yourvehicle. You can’t see
or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or
death. (See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.) To
maximize your safety when towing a trailer:
Have your exhaustsystem inspected for
leaks, and makenecessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
0 Keep the rearmost windows closed.
0 If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through awindow in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating orcooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This
will bring fresh,
outside air into yourvehicle. Do not use
RECIRC because it only recirculates the
air inside your vehicle. (See “Comfort
Controls’’ in theIndex.)
4-37
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting outfor the open road, you’ll want get
to
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with
the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight
of the
trailer. And always keepin mind that the vehicle youare
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicleis by itself.
Following Distance
Stay at least twiceas far behind the vehicle ahead
as you
would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
Before you start, check
the trailer hitch and platform
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
you’re towinga trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.
If the trailer has
longer, you’ll need togo much farther beyond the
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and passed vehicle before you can return
to your lane.
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakesare working. This lets you check your
Backing Up
electrical connection at the same time.
Hold the bottomof the steering wheel with
one hand.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the
Then, to move the trailer to the left,
just move that hand
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes to the left.To move the trailer to the right, move your
are still working.
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you,
4-38
Making n r n s
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailerto come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning witha trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have
extra wiring.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn
or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re aboutto turn, change lanesor stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flashfor turns evenif the bulbs on the trailer
are burnedout. Thus, you may think drivers behindyou
are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
4-39
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shiftto a lower gearbefore you start
down a long or steep downgrade.If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakesso much that
they would get hot and
no longer work well.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer can
be damaged.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 kmih) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
But if you ever haveto park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than
1,000 lbs. (450 kg), you may preferto drive in
THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(D)
(or, as you need to, lower
a
gear). This will minimize
heat build-up and extend
the life of your transaxle.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift
into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and then shift to
PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-40
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
@
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until thc
4. Stop and have son
’
---
.ailer is clear of the chocks.
pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer.See the Maintenance Schedulefor more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake adjustment.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly.If you’re trailering, it’s
a good idea to review these sections before
you start
your trip.
Check periodicallyto see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
@% NOTES
4-42
fi
NOTES
4-43
@bNOTES
4-44
0Section 5
Problems on theRoad
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-13
5-24
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
If a Tire Goes Flat
5 -24
5-24
5-34
5-35
Air Inflator (Option)
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning
flashers buttonis on top of
the steering column. Press
the button in to turn on
your flashers.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your keyis in, and evenif the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, push the button down and
it will
pop back up by itself.
Your hazard warning flasherslet you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash
on and off.
5-2
When the hazard warning flashersare on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the sideof the road about300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has rundown, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But pleaseuse the following steps listed to
do it safely.
On vehicles equipped with the optionalpower sliding
door, a low voltage battery
or replacing a batterymay
cause the system to become inoperative.See “Power
Sliding Door”in the Index for more information.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps
could result incostly damage
to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby
your warranty.
Trying to start your
vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and itcould damage yourvehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
I
Batteries can h t you. They can be dangerous
because:
0 They contain acid that can burn
you.
0 They contain gasthat canexplode or ignite.
0 They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these stepsexactly, some or all
of these things canhurt you.
NOTICE:
-1
If the othersystem isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.
5-3
2. Get the vehiclesclose enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause
a ground
connection you don’t want.You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
I NOTICE:
To avoid the possibilityof the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly
on both vehicles
involved in thejump start procedure. Put an
automatic transaxle inPARK (P).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn
off all
lamps that aren’t needed as well
as radios. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
In
addition, it could save your radio!
5-4
NOTICE:
If you leave your radioon, it could be badly
damaged. The repairswouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative(-) terminals on
each battery.
I \
CAUTION:
An electric fan canstart upeven when the engine
is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands,
clothing andtools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+)jump starting
terminal. The terminal is
under a tethered cap at the
front of the underhood fuse
and relay center. Pullup the
cap to access theremote
positive (+) terminal.
You should always use the remote positive(+) terminal
instead of the positive (+) terminal on your battery.
Using a match neara battery can cause battery
gas toexplode. People havebeen hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the batteryhas enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the
ACDelco Freedom’
battery installed in every
new GM vehicle. But if
a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the
place with
water andget medical help immediately.
5-5
A CAUTION:
3
7. Now connect the
black negative(-) cable
to the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engineis running.
5. Connect the red positive(+) cable to the positive(+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive(+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
5-6
...
,
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The otherend of the negative(-) cable doesn 1go
to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metal
part on the engineof the vehicle with the dead battery.
8. Attach the cable at least
18 inches(45 cm) away
from the dead battery,
but not nearengine parts
that move.
11. Remove the cablesin reverse order toprevent
electrical shorting. Takecare that they don’t touch
each other orany other metal.
The electrical
connection is just as
good there, but the
chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is
much less.
9. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
10. Try to start the vehicle withthe dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, probably
it
needs service.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B . Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-7
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have aGM dealer or a professional towing
service tow your vehicle. Theycan provide the right
equipment and know how to tow
it without damage.See
“Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
If your vehicle has beenchanged or modified since it
was factory-new by adding aftermarket items likefog
lamps, aero skirting,or special tires and wheels, these
things can be damaged during towing.
Before youdo anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tellthe towing service:
0
That your vehicle hasfront-wheel drive.
That your vehicle cannotbe towed from the front or
rear with sling-typeequipment.
0
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
0
Wether you can still move the shift lever.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
5-8
To help avoid injury to you or others:
0 Never let passengersride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
0 Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
e Never tow with damagedparts not
fully secured.
0 Never getunder your vehicle after it has
been lifted bythe tow truck.
0 Always useseparate safety chains on each
side when towinga vehicle.
0 Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.
~~
NOTICE:
A vehicle can fall from a car carrierif it isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause
a collision,
serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with
chains or
steel cables beforeit is transported.
Don’t usesubstitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.)that can becut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use
T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use
J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and
suspension components.
If you are using car-carrier equipment, you must
pull the Electronic Level Control (ELC) fuse, in
the instrument panel fuse block, before securing
the vehicle.
Damage to the shocksor leveling system may
occur if the Electronic Level Control (ELC) fuse
is not disabled.
When your vehicleis being towed, have the ignition key
in OFF.The steering wheel should be clamped in a
straight-ahead position, with a clamping device
designed for towing service.Do not use the vehicle’s
steering column lockfor this. Forfront towing, the
transaxle should be inPARK (P) and the parking brake
released. For rear towing, the transaxle should
be in
NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake engaged.
5-9
I NOTICE:
Front Towing
Tow Limits -- 55 mph (90 km/h), 500 miles (800 km)
Your vehicle has front-wheel drive; do not have it
towed with the frontwheels in contactwith the
ground orvehicle damage may occur. A dolly
must beused under the frontwheels when towing
from the rear or the
vehicle must be transported
on a flatbed carrier.
Attach T-hook chainsin the
front of the wheels into the
slots of the front shipping
brackets on the frame (both
sides). Insert the hook from
the inward sideof the slot,
not the outward side.
I NOTICE:
Do not have yourvehicle towed with the front
wheels in contactwith the ground. Thiswill
damage the transaxle.
If the vehicle must be towed on the frontwheels,
it cannot be towed more thana total of 500 miles
(800 km) for thelifetime of the vehicle.
5-10
I NOTICE:
When attaching T-hooks to the shipping slots
in the frame rail, attach them to inside
the
of the frame toavoid damage to the frame or
front fascia.
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or the
front bumpersystem will be damaged. Use
wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional
ramping may be required for car-carrier
equipment. Use safety chainsand wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from
vehicle to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift
equipment. To help avoid damage, installa
towing dolly and raise thevehicle until adequate
clearance is obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
5-11
Rear Towing
A towing dolly must be used under thefront wheels
when towing from the reay:
5-12
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or the rear
bumper system will be damaged. Use wheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use
safety chainsand wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage avehicle. Damage can occur from
vehicle to groundor vehicle to wheel-lift
equipment. To help avoid damage, install a
towing dolly and raise thevehicle until adequate
clearance is obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index.You also have a low
coolant level light on your
instrument panel. See “Low
Coolant Light’’ inthe Index.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
NOTICE:
I
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow
the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair
the cause of coolant loss and change oil.
theSee
“Engine Oil, Whento Change” in the Index.
Should an overheated engine condition exist, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups
of three cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In this
mode, you will noticea significant loss in power and
engine performance. The low coolant light may come on
and thetemperature gage will indicate an overheat
condition exists. This emergency operating mode allows
your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an
emergency. Towinga trailer in theoverheat protection
mode should be avoided.
5-13
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Steam from an overheated
engine can burnyou
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from theengine if you see or hear steamcoming
from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away
from thevehicle until itcools down. Wait until
there is no signof steam or coolant beforeyou
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine
is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch
fire. You or
others could be badly burned.Stop your engineif
of the vehicle until the
it overheats, and get out
engine is cool.
I NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because
you keep
driving with no coolarmt, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. Thecostly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
in the Index.
5-14
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning butsee or hear no
steam, the problem may not
be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get alittle too hot when you:
If you no longer have theoverheat warning, you
can drive. Just tobe safe, driveslower for about
10 minutes. If the warning doesn’tcome back on,
you can drive normally.
0
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and
park your
vehicle right away.
0
Stop after high-speed driving.
If there’s still no signof steam, you canidle the engine
0
Idle for long periods in traffic.
0
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no signof steam,
try thisfor a minute or so:
1. Turn off your air conditioner.
for two or three minutes while
you’re parked, to see if
the warning stops.But then, if you still have the
warning, turn o f t h e engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down. Also,see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously in
this section.
2. Turn on your heater tofull hot at the highest fan
speed and openthe window as necessary.
You may decide not tolift the hood but to get service
help right away.
3. If you’re in a trafficjam, shift to NEUTRAL(N);
otherwise, shift to the highest
gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D)
or THIRD (3).
5-15
When you decide it’s safe to lift
the hood, here’s what
rou’ll see:
A CAUTION:
I
An electric engine coolingfan under the hood can
start up even when the engineis not running and
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else untilit cools down.
i. Radiator Pressure Cap
3. Electric Engine Fans
3. Coolant Recovery Tank
5-16
A CAUTION:
Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine
parts, canbe very hot. Don't touch them.
If you
do, you can be burned.
Don't run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine,it could lose all coolant.That could
cause an engine fire, andyou could beburned.
Get any leakfixed before you drive thevehicle.
The coolant level shouldbe at or above the
FULL COLD mark.
If it isn't, you may havea leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump
or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
5-17
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your
engine
without coolantisn’t covered by your warranty.
If there seems to be no
leak, with the engine on, checkto
see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.If the
engine is overheating, bothfans should be running. If
they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant
level isn’t at or above theFULL COLD mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and
DEX-COOL’ engine coolant at the coolant recovery
tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Indexfor
more information.)
5-18
A CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your
cooling system
can be dangerous. Plainwater, or some other
liquid likealcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’scoolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water
or thewrong mixture,
your engine couldget too hot butyou wouldn’t
get theoverheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire andyou or otherscould be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
DEX-COOL@coolant.
I NOTICE:
I
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
,A CAU
I
ION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol
and itwill burn if the engine partsare hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank
is at or
above the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try.You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling
system is cool before youdo it.
a
5-19
A CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from acooling
hot
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
if you turn the radiator
are under pressure, and
pressure cap even a little they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the capwhen the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and the
radiator pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to
turn the pressure
cap.
--
5-20
--
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
i i
2. Then keep turning the pressurecap, but now push
down as you turnit. Remove the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, isno longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don’t
press down whileturning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, waitfor that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressureleft.
5-21
L
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture, up to the base
of the filler neck.
(See “Engine Coolant”in the Index for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.)
5-22
4. Start the engine andlet it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch outthe
for
engine cooling fans.
5. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower.
If the levelis lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
h
L
I
1
F
6. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
7. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to theFULL
COLD mark.
8. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank.
5-23
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
It’s unusualfor a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,If a tire goesflat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
especially if you maintain your tires properly.
If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. warning flashers.
But if you should everhave a “blowout,” here are a few
1
tips about what to expect and what to do:
’
A
-
CAUTION:
If a front tire fails, theflat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your off
foot
the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel
fiiy.
Changing a tire can cause an
injury. The vehicle
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to can slip off the jack androll overyou or other
a stop well out
of the traffic lane.
people. You and they could be badly injured.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a Find a level place to changeyour tire. To help
skid andmay require the same correction you’d use in a prevent thevehicle from moving:
skid. In any rear blowout,remove your footfrom the
1. Set the parking brakefirmly.
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by
2. Put the shiftlever in PARK (P).
steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
It may be
3. I’urn off the engine.
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
To be even more certain thevehicle won’t move,
-- well off the road if possible.
brake to a stop
you can putblocks at the front and rear
of the
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
tire farthestaway from theone being changed.
jacking equipment to change flat
a tire safely.
That would be the tire on the other side
of the
vehicle, at the oppositeend.
Air Inflator (Option)
Your vehicle may have an air inflator used to bring tires
up to the proper pressure.See “Accessory Inflator
System” in the Index
for more details.
i-24
-
-
-
le and Tools
The equipment you’ll
need is in the storage
compartment at the rear
of the vehicle,on the
passenger’s side.
The following steps will tell you how
to use thejack and
change a tire.
Remove the side convenience nets. Open thejack
storage compartment by lifting up the tab and pulling
the cover off.
5-25
EXTENSION
(CHISEL END)
INSTRUCTIONS
I
JACK & TOOL STORAGE
Remove thejack and jacking tools by loosening the
wing nut and bracket.
Separate the plastic pouch from the jack and remove the
jacking tools (folding wrench and shaft) from the pouch.
RETAINER
SPARE TIRE IS STORED UNDER
REAR COMPARTMENT FLOOR
(VALVE STEM DOWN)
The compact spare tire
is located under the vehicle,
ahead of the rear bumper. Insert the narrow end of the
shaft into the hole above the rear bumper. Then attach
the folding wrench to the shaft.
Rotate the folding wrenchto the left to lower the
compact spare tire untilit can be pulled from under
the vehicle.
5-26
€3
C
The tools you’ll be using include thejack (A), shaft (B)
and folding wrench(C).
Slide the cable retainer through the center
of the spare,
then place the compact spare tire
near the flat tire.
5-27
P
J
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
If your vehicle has
aluminum wheels, use
the handle of the folding
wrench to prythe large
center cap off.
Then with the other end of the wrench, loosen the nuts.
5-28
2. If your vehicle has the plastic “bolt-on” wheel
covers, you cannot separate the nylon wheel nut caps
from the cover. Loosen them completely using the
folding wrench, and removethe wheel cover. If the
wheel nut caps have been completely loosened, the
wheel cover will comeoff easily.
3. Loosen the wheel
nuts -- but do not
remove them -- using
the folding wrench.
(Turn the handle about
180 degrees, thenflip
the handle back tothe
starting position. This
avoids taking the wrench
off the lug nut for
each turn.)
(10 CM.)
I NOTICE:
-
6 IN
(15 CM.)
4. Near each wheel,
there is a notch inthe
vehicle’s body. Position
the jack and raise the
jack head until it fits
firmly into the notchin
the vehicle’s frame
nearest the flat tire.
I
Do not place the jack under the rear axle control
arms. Only use the areas shown for proper
jack location.
Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
A CAUT'ON:
Getting under avehle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you
could be badlyinjured orkilled. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supportedonly by a jack.
' A P UTI
Raising yourvehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage thevehicle and even
make thevehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury andvehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into theproper location before raising
the vehicle.
5-30
1
Attach the folding
5 - wrench tothe jack, and
rotate the wrenchto the
right to raise thejack
head a few inches.
6 . Raise the vehicleby rotating the folding wrench to
the right in thejack. Raise the vehiclefar enough off
the groundso there is enough roomfor the spare tire
to fit.
7. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
8. Remove any rustor dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
'
A CAUTION:
-1
Never use oil or grease on studs ornuts. If you
do, thenuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
~~
A CAUTION:
9. Install the spare tire and replace the wheel nuts with
the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel
is held
against the hub.
Rust or dirt on wheel,
the
or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and causean accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
the
where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a papertowel
to dothis; but be sure touse a scraper orwire
brush later,if you need to, to getall the rust or
dirt off.
5-31
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a criss-cross
sequence, as shown.
a CAUTION:
10. Lower the vehicleby attaching the folding wheel
wrench to the jack and rotating the wrench
to the
left. Lower thejack completely.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead toan accident.
Be sure to use the correctwheel nuts. If you have
to replace them,be sure toget new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere assoon as you can andhave the
nuts tightenedwith a torquewrench to 100 lb-ft
(140 Nom).
L
NOTICE:
Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid
expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Don’t try to puta wheel cover on the compact spare tire.
It won’t fit. Store the wheelcover securely in the rearof
the vehicle until youhave the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
I NOTICE:
Wheel coverswon’t fit on your compact spare.If
you try to put awheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Storing a Flat or 5 a r e Tire and Tools
A CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tireor other equipmentin the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
collision, loose
cause injury.In a sudden stop or
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the properplace.
Lay the tire near the rearof the vehicle with the valve
stem down. Slide the cable retainer through the center
of
the wheel andstart to raise the tire. When the tire
is
almost in the stored position, turn the tire
so the valve is
towards the rearof the vehicle. This will help when you
check and maintain tire pressure in the spare.
Keep raising the wheel until
you hear the hoist
mechanism click twice.This means the wheelis firmly
stored against theunderside of the vehicle. Push
against the wheel tobe sure it does not move andis
stored securely.
5-33
Unless you have the plastic “bolt-on” wheel covers, be
sure to also store the center cap. When you replace the
compact spare witha full-size tire, replacethe bolt-on
wheel covers and the center cap. Tighten them “hand
tight” over the wheel nuts, using the folding wrench.
.BAG &
TOOLS
NOTE:
INSTALL, BOlTOM
OF BAG
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new,it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi
(420 P a ) .
After installing the compact spareon your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
spare tireis correctly inflated. The compact spare is
made to perform well at speedsup to 65 mph (105
TOOL STORAGE
km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you
can finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired
Replace alljacking tools as they were storedin the jack
or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s bestto
storage compartment and replace the compartment
replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon
as you
cover. To replace the cover,line up the tabs on the right can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in
of the cover withthe slots in the cover opening. Push the case you need it again.
cover in place and push down
the tab so that it rests in
the groove. This secures the cover in place.
I
5-34
NOTICE:
When the compact spare
is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel,
of your vehicle.
and maybe other parts
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’tmix your compact spare tireor wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chainswon’t fit your compact spare.
Using
them can damage your
vehicle and can damage
the chainstoo. Don’t use tire chainson your
compact spare.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
What you don’t want to do when your vehicleis stuck is
to spin your wheelstoo fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
I
If you let your tires spinhigh
at speed, they can
explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And,
of the vehicle can
the transaxle or other parts
overheat. Thatcould cause an engine
compartment fireor other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin thewheels as little aspossible. Don’t
spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
5-35
NOTICE:
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels.
If your vehicle
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts
of your
has traction control,you should turn your traction
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels control system off. (See “Traction
Control System” in
too fast while shifting your transaxle back and
the Index.) Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, when the transaxle is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out
see “Tire Chains”in the Index.
after a few tries,you may need tobe towed out. If you
do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle’’ in
the Index.
~
5-36
@% NOTES
5-37
b% NOTES
5-38
Section 6 Service and AppearanceCare
Here you will find information about thecare of your vehicle.This section begins with service and
fuel information,
and then it shows how check
to
important fluid and lubricant levels. There
is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
Service
6-3
Fuel
6-7
Filling
Portable
a
Fuel
Container
6- 8
Checking Things UndertheHood
6-11
Engine
Oil
6-15
Cleaner
Air
6-16
PassengerCompartmentAirFilter
Replacement
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
6- 18
6-2 1
Engine Coolant
6-24
Radiator PressureCap
Windshield Washer Fluid
6-25
Brakes
6-26
Battery
6-30
6-3 1
Bulb Replacement
Windshield WiperBlade Replacement
6-39
6-40
6-48
6-48
6-52
6-54
6-54
6-55
6-56
6-57
6-64
6-65
6-65
6-66
6-66
6-66
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications
Vehicle Dimensions
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to
be happy with it.We hope you’llgo to your dealer for
GM parts and
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper Chevrolet Service Manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can.To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want tokeep your GM vehicle allGM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Genuine
6-2
Your vehicle hasan air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “ServicingYour Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all
parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date
of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
Fuel
You can be injured and yourve :le could be
damaged if you try to doservice workon a
vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, theproper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt anyvehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts,bolts and
other fasteners, “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily
confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners,parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
L
Adding Equipmentto the
Your Vehicle
- hide
of
Things you might addto the outsideof your vehicIe can
affect the airflow aroundit. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside
of
your vehicle.
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or
higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications
ASTM D4814 in the United States andCGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been
developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers
Association (AAMA) for better vehicle performance
and engine protection. Gasolines meeting theAAMA
specification could provide improved driveability
and emission control system protection comparedto
other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane
is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87,you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough,
it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But
don’t worry if you hear alittle pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving upa hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t haveto buy a higher octanefuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicleis certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated onthe underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate
on fuels that meet
California specifications. Ifsuch fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test.If this occurs, return
to your authorized Chevrolet dealer
for diagnosis to
determine the causeof failure. In the eventit is
determined that thecause of the condition isthe type of
fuels used, repairs may
not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions containan octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT);
ask your service station operator whether or not
his fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containingMMT are used,
spark pluglife may be reduced and your emission
control system performance may be affected.
The
malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on.If this occurs, returnto your authorized
Chevrolet dealer for service.
6-4
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent depositsfrom forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to
add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines
containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolinesmay be available in your area to
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use these gasolinesif they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
If you planon driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not
recommended inthe previous text onfuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
When the fuel door is opened on a vehicle with dual
sliding doors, the driver’s side sliding door will only
open partway.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club,or
contact a major oil company that
does business in the
country where you’llbe driving.
You can also write us at the
following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN).
General Motors Overseas DistributionCorporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
While refueling, hang thecap by the tetherfrom the
hook on the filler door hinge or let cap
the hang by the
tether as shown.
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very injuries.
bad
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away fromgasoline.
To remove the cap, turnit slowly to theleft
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring
in it; if you let
go of the cap toosc I, it will spring back to the right.
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignitesit, you could be badlyburned.
Gasoline canspray outon you if‘you open the
fuel fillercap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tankis nearly full, and
is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap
slowly and
wait for any“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the
way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline
from
painted surfaces as soon as possible.
See “Cleaning the,
Outside of Your Vehicle” inthe Index.
I
6-6
When you put thecap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until youhear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuelcap has been leftoff or
improperly installed. This would allow fuelto
evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp’’ L the Index.
*
-
.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer canget onefor you. If you get
the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and yourfuel tank andemissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
Fillinq a Portable Fuel Container
I
Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in
your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the
container can ignite the gasoline
vapor. You can
be badly burned and your
vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring thefill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained
until thefilling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-7
Hood Release
Checking Things Under the Hood
I
A CAUTION:
I
An electric fan under the
hood can start up and
injure you even when the engineis not running,
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
A CAUTION:
Things that burn can
get onhot engine parts and
start afire. These include liquids
like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washerand
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or
spill
things thatwill burn ontoa hot engine.
6-8
To open the hood,first pull the hood release handle
inside the vehicle.
:
. ... , ..,. ,
Pull forward on the hood
prop to release itfrom its
storage clip. Then put the
end of the hood propinto
the slot in the underside
of
the hood.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and push on
up the
underhood release.
Lift the hood.
The hood prop may behot due to increased engine
temperatures under the hood,so be careful when
handling it. Use your hood prop sleeve when handling
the hood prop.
6-9
When you lift the hood, you'll see these items:
rn
A. Underhood
Fuse
and
Relay Center
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
C. Windshield Washer
Fluid Reservoir
6-10
D.
E.
E
G.
Radiator
Pressure
Cap
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill Location
Engine Oil Dipstick
H.
I.
J.
K.
Transaxle
Fluid
Dipstick
Brake Master Cylinder
AirCleaner
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Before closing the hood,be sure all the filler capsare
on properly. Thenlift the hood to relieve pressure on
the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in
the hood and return theprop to its retainer. Then just
let the hood down and close
it firmly.
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time
you
get fuel. In orderto get an accurate reading, the
oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Underhood Lamp (If Equipped)
Your underhood lamp will go on when you open
the hood.
Engine Oil
hhhhhh
LWEL
If the LEVEL lighton
the instrument panel comes
on, it means you needto
check your engine oil
level right away.
The engine oil dipstickis located at the frontof the
The dipstick
For more information, see “LOW Oil Level Light” in the engine compartment, near the center.
handle
has
a
bright,
yellow
loop
design
for easy
Index. You should check your engine oil level regularly:
identification.
this is an added reminder.
Turn off theengine and give the oil a few minutes
to
drain back into the oil pan.
If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not showthe actual level.
a
6-11
Checking Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with
a paper towelor
cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
I
NOTICE:
Don’t add too muchoil. If your engine hasso
much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
The engine oil fill cap is
located just behind the
engine oil dipstick.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart oil.
of But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind
of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
Be sure tofill it enough to put the level somewherein
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-12
What Kind of Engine Oilto Use
Oils recommendedfor your vehicle canbe identified
by loolung for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified
by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use anyoil which
does not carry this Starburstsymbol.
_If you change your own
oil, be sure you useoil
that has the Starburst
symbol onthe front of the
oil container. If you have
your oil changed for you,
be surethe oil put into
your engine is American
Petroleum Institute certified
for gasoline engines.
b
RECOMMENDED SAE YlSCOSlTT GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING,
SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE YlSCOSlTv GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
1
HOT
WEATHER
I
SA€ 1OW-30
I-
You should also usethe proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in thefollowing chart:
I
COLD
WEATHER
DONOTUSE SA€ 2OW-50 OR ANYOTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-13
As shown in the chart, S A E 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, youcan use S A E 1OW-30 if it's going
to be 0"F (- 18 " C) or above.These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils,such as S A E 20W-50.
Engine Oil Additives
Don't add anything to your oil.
Your dealer is ready to
advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is truefor you, use the shorttripkity
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
"Starburst" symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirementsfor
your vehicle.
If you arein an area wherethe temperature falls below
-20°F (-29"C), consider using eitheran S A E 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection
for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
6-14
maintenance schedule:
0
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
0
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
0
Most trips are through dusty areas.
0
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on of
top
your vehicle.
0
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes
engine oil to
break down sooner.If any one of these is truefor your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occurs fust .
If none of them is true, use the longtriphighway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months-- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
Air Cleaner
.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could
even causecancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with
soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Washor properly throw
away clothing or rags containing usedengine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
The air cleaner is located at the front of the engine
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing Oil
compartment (on the driver’s side of the vehicle),
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil under the
engine coolant reservoir.
by putting it in the trash, pouring
it on the ground,into
sewers, or into streamsor bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it toa place that collects used oil.
If
you have a problem properly disposingof your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station
or a local recycling
center for help.
6-15
Checking or Replacing the AirCleaner
1. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the air
NOTICE:
cleaner housing.
2. Turn back the air inlet panel and
rest it on topof the
housing. The air intake tube
is designed to flex back;
you do not needto disconnect it.
3. After replacing theair cleaner filter, seat the tabs on
the bottomof the panelinto the slots at the bottom.
4. Latch the hooksto secure the panel in place.If the
panel moves easily, check that the tabs
are seated
correctly inthe slots.
Operating theengine withthe air cleaner off can
cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner
not only cleans the air,it stops flameif the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there, and theengine
backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the engine
with
the air cleaner off.
If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a
damaging enginefire. And, dirt caneasily get
into your engine,which will damage it. Always
have the air cleanerin place whenyou’re driving.
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter Replacement
Passenger compartment air, both outside and
recirculated air,is routed througha passenger
compartment filter, whichis part of a two-piece filter
system. The filter removes certain contaminants from
the air, including pollen and dust particles. Reductions
in airflow, which may occur more quickly in dusty
areas, indicate that the filter needs
to be replaced early.
For how often to change the air filter, see “Maintenance
Schedule” in the Index.
The access panelfor the air filteris in the backof the
glove box.
1. Pull the tab up and out on the outer access panel.
2. Then squeezethe tab on the left of the inner
access panel.
3. The first air filter will pull straight out.To remove
the second, reach in and slide it toward the opening.
Pull the second filterout.
4. Replace the filters by reversingStep 3. Make sure
the filters are insertedso that the sealing foam is
angled in the same direction on both filters. For the
type of filter to use, see “Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts”in the Index.
5. Close the inner access door, while saueezing the tab,
to be sureit is tightly closed.
of the
6. Snap the outer access panel into the back
glove box.
6-17
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may
choose to have this done your
at Chevrolet dealership
Service Department.
A good timeto check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engineoil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles
(83 000 km)if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one
or more of these conditions:
If you do it yourself, be sure
to follow all the
instructions here,or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches90°F (32 O C) or higher.
NOTICE:
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be to
sure
get an accurate readingyou
if check your
transaxle fluid.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, policeor delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any
of these
conditions, the fluid and filter
do not require changing.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services’’ in the Index.
6-18
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be
at normal
operating temperature, whichis 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed upby driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it's colder than50°F ( lO"C), you
may have to drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
1. The dipstick is located toward the back of the engine
compartment, next to the brake master cylinder. The
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
dipstick handle has a bright, red loop design for easy
in PARK (P).
identification. Pull out the dipstick and wipeit with a
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
clean ragor paper towel.
lever through each gear range, pausing
for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
lever inPARK (P).
6-19
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the levelinto the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L). Don’t ove$ZZ.
I NOTICE:
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level.The fluid level mustbe in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid levelis in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick backin all the way.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use.See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
6-20
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON@-111,because fluid with that label
is
made especiallyfor your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused byfluid other than DEXRON-I11
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid levelas
described under “How to Check.”
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick backin all the way.
~
~
Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL J engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLd extended life coolant.
The following explains your coolingsystem and how
to add coolant when it is low.If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of water andDEX-COOL@
coolant will:
0
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
NOTICE:
When addingcoolant, itis important thatyou
use only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOLis added to the
system, premature engine, heater coreor
radiator corrosion mayresult. In addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage causedby the
is not
use of coolant other than DEX-COOL@
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
--
Give boiling protection up to 265 O F ( 129 C).
O
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
0
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
6-21
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-halfDEX-COOL@coolant which
won’t damage aluminumparts. If you use this mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
I
I
Adding only plain water to your
cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,
or some other
liquid like alcohol,can boil before the proper
coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set forthe proper coolant
mixture. With plainwater or thewrong mixture,
your enginecould get too hot butyou wouldn’t
get the overheatwarning. Your engine could
catch fire andyou or otherscould be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
DEX-COOL@coolant.
6-22
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine couldoverheat andbe badly damaged.
The repaircost wouldn’t be coveredby your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack theengine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than
four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the propercoolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitorsor additives which claim to
improve thesystem. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
it
on,
comes
light
The engine coolant reservoir is located on the driver’s
side of the vehicle, above theair cleaner.
If this
means you’re lowon
engine coolant.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixtureat the coolant recovery tank.
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should
be at FULL COLD, or a little higher. When your
engine is warm, the level shouldbe above the FULL
COLD mark,or a little higher.
’hrning the radiator pressure cap
when the
engine and radiatorare hot canallow steam and
scalding liquids toblow out and burnyou badly.
With the coolant recovery tank,
you will almost
at the radiator.
never have to add coolant
Never turn the radiator pressure capeven a
little when the engine and radiator
are hot.
--
--
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
6-23
Thermostat
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts, Coolant contains ethylene
glycol,
and it will burn if the engineparts arehot
enough. Don't spill coolant ona hot engine.
Radiator I ressure Cap
Engine coolant temperature is controlledby a thermostat
in the engine coolant system.The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, aGM thermostat
is recommended.
Power Steering Fluid
NOTICE:
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and mustbe tightly installed to
prevent coolantloss and possible engine damage
from overheating.Be sure the arrowson the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
When you replace your radiator pressure cap,
a GM cap
is recommended.
'l'kvGower steering
fluid reservoir is locatedto the right
of the windshield washer fluid reservoir, at the back
of
the engine compartment.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
It is not necessaryto regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspectthere is aleak in the systemor
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid
loss in this system
could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe thecap and
the top ofthe reservoir clean, then unscrew the
cap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the
cap again and
look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
When the engine compartment is hot, the level should
be at theH mark. When it’scold, the level shouldbe at
the C mark. If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you should
add fluid.
When you need windshield washer fluid,be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If you willbe
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, usea fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle, nearthe
fuse and relay center.
What to Use
To determine what kindof fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failureto use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add
washer fluid until the tank is full.
6-25
Brakes
Brake Fluid
0
0
0
When usingconcentrated washerfluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the
solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other partsof the washersystem. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washerfluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank
only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs.
if it is
which could damage the tank
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washersystem and paint.
6-26
Your brake master cylinder reservoiris here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir mightgo down. The first is thatthe
brake fluid goes down toan acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are putin,
the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that
fluid is leaking outof the brake system.If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means
that sooner or later yourbrakes won’t work well, or
won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to“top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct
a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’llhave too much
fluid when you get new brake linings.You should add
(or remove)brake fluid, as necessary, only when work
is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
I
A CAUTAN:
If you have too much brake fluid,
it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engine
is hot enough.You or others could be burned,
and your vehiclecould be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when workis done on the brake
hydraulic system.
BRAKE
United States
Canadian
When your brake fluid falls toa low level, your brake
warning light willcome on. See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
6-27
What toAdd
When you do need brake fluid, use only
DOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11 (GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
NOTICE:
0
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir
cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
0
With thewrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not
work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could causea
crash. Always use the proper brakefluid.
6-28
Using the wrong fluidcan badly damage
brake system parts. Forexample, just afew
drops of mineral-based oil, such asengine
oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake
system parts so badly thatthey’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle hasfront disc brakes and reardrum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake
pads are worn and new padsare needed. The sound
may come andgo or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when youare pushing on the brake
pedal firmly).
A CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident.When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Some driving conditions or climates may causea
brake squeal when the brakes are
first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessaryto help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts
in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but
if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the
rear brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear
brake drums shouldbe removed and inspectedeach time
the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When
you have thefront brake pads replaced, have the rear
brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should alwaysbe replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this
manual underPart C “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections.”
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
6-29
Brake Pedal Travel
Battery
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height,or if there isa rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign
of brake trouble.
Every new Chevrolet hasan ACDelco Freedom@
battery. You never have to add water one
to of these.
When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend
an ACDelco Freedom battery. Get
one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label.
Brake Adjustment
Every timeyou apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust
for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking systemon a modern vehicle iscomplex.
Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to
have really good bralung.
Your vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts
of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and youhave to have new ones put in-- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts.
If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For
example, if someone putsin brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakescan change -- for the worse. The braking
performance you’vecome to expect can change in many
other waysif someone putsin the wrong replacement
brake parts.
6-30
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle
for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative(-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
1 Ihl CAUTIO
b
I
I
-
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode.You can be badly hurt you
if
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to
learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
Jump Starting
For jump starting instructions, see “Jump Starting” in
the Index.
Bulb Replacement
Halogen Bulbs
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burstif you drop or scratch the
bulb. You or
others could be injured.Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
NOTICE:
When replacing the headlamp bulb, do not leave
the bulb out for any length
of time. This could
To
cause nitrogen gas to escape from the lamp.
minimize nitrogen gasfrom escaping within the
headlamp, the headlamp must
be placed ona flat
surface with the lens facing down when removing
the bulb.
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the front parking/turn signallamp assembly.
See “Front Parkingmum Signal Lamps” later in
this section.
6-31
I
3. Remove the two wing nuts located on top
of the
headlamp assembly.
4. Unscrew the black retainer ring that holds the bulb
assembly in place.
6-32
5 . Pull the bulb assembly straight up from the
lamp housing.
6. Unhook the electrical connectorby lifting up the
blue tabs and pulling the bulb out.
7. Replace the new bulb through the black retainer ring
and into the electrical connector. Push the bulb
firmly enough so that the blue tabshook over the tab
on the bulb.
8. Carefully put the bulb assembly back into the lamp
housing and tighten the black retainer ring in place.
Be careful not to damage the bulb on the headlamp
aiming bar.
6-33
Front P a r k i n e r n Signal Lamps
1. Open the hood.
9. Align the pins on the bottomof the headlamp
assembly with the holes in the lamp support bracket
while placing the holes in the assembly over the
bolts where the wing nuts attach.
10. Replace and tighten the wing nuts.
11. Replace the parkinglturn signal lamp assembly by
lining up the tabs at the back of the assembly with
the holes in the fender.
12. Tighten the bolt connecting the parkinghurn
signal lamp assembly.Be sure the tab from the
parking/turn signal lamp assembly is inboard of
the tab from the headlamp assembly.
6-34
k
2. Remove the thumb screw attaching the parking/turn
signal lamp assemblyto the headlamp assembly.
3. Pull the parkinghrn signal lamp assembly away
from the body.
4. Unscrew the bulb socket from the lamp assemblyby
pressing the tab while turning itto the left.
5. Replace the bulbby pulling the oldone out and
gently pushing the newone into the lamp socket.
6. Line up the tabs on the sockets with the gaps in the
socket holes and screw the
bulb socket backinto the
lamp housing until an audible click
is heard (thetab
popping back out).
7. To replace the lamp assembly, line
up and insertthe
tabs on the backof the assembly with the slots in the
fender. Engage the lower clip on the front
of the
lamp assembly, keeping the upper tab on the
parking/turn signallamp assembly inboardof the
headlamp bracket tab.
8. To align the parking/turn signal lamp assembly with the
headlamp assembly, lift up the parking/turn signal lamp
assembly until the upper edge
is contacting the fender.
9. Fasten the parking/tum signallamp assembly to the
headlamp assembly with the thumb screw removed
in Step 1.
K
-_
6-35
Front Sidemarker
1. Open the hood.
5. Replace the bulb by pulling the oldone out and
gently pushing the new one
into the lamp socket.
2. Remove the thumb screw attaching the parking/turn
signal lamp assemblyto the headlarnp assembly.
3. Pull the parking/turn signal lamp assembly away
from the body.
4. Unscrew the bulb socketfrom the lamp assemblyby
turning it to the left.
6-36
6. Line up the tabs on the sockets with the gaps in the
socket holes and screw the bulb socket back into the
lamp housing.
8. To align the parking/turn signal lamp assembly with
the headlamp assembly, lift up the parking/turn
signal lamp assembly until
the upper edge is
contacting the fender.
9. Fasten the parkinghrn signal lamp assembly to the
headlamp assembly with the thumb screw removed
in Step 1.
Taillamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp housing
on the inboard side.
7. To replace the lamp assembly, line up and insert
the tabs on theback of the assembly with the slots
in the fender.Engage the lower clip on the frontof
the lamp assembly, keeping the upper tab on the
parkinghrn signal lamp assembly inboard of the
headlamp bracket tab.
3. Pull off the entire taillamp housing. The
locator/retaining pins on the outboard side are part
of the lamp assembly and will
remain intact
during removal.
6-37
4. Remove the bulb holder by pressing the four
retaining tabs and pulling the holder away from
the assembly.
5. Replace the bulb(s) by pulling the old one(s) out
and gently pushing the new one(s) into the bulb
holder socket.
A. Tail Bulb
B. Back-up Bulb
C. Turn Signal Bulb
D. StoplI'ail Bulb
6. Snap the bulb holder backinto place making sure all
retaining tabs are properly over the bulb holder tabs.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by inserting the
outboard locatinghetaining pins untilthe lamp is
seated. Secure with the inboard screws.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer service department.
6-38
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement
For the proper windshield wiper blade length and type,
see “Replacement Parts” in the Index.
Replacement bladescome in different types andare
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove the
type with a release clip:
1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipersare at the
outer positions of the wipe pattern.
The blades are
more accessiblefor removaVreplacement while in
this position.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arrn away from the
windshield or backglass.
4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass,
push the release clip from under the blade
connecting point and pull the blade assembly down
toward the glass to remove it from the wiperarm.
5. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm
until you hear the releaseclip “click” into place.
6-39
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made
by
a leading tire manufacturer.
If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Chevrolet Warranty
booklet for details.
~~
CAUTION: (Continued)
0
A C WTION:
0
Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires
are dangerous.
0 Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result
of too much friction.
You could havean air-out anda serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle’’ in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued
Underinflated tirespose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check
all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked
when your tiresare cold.
Overinflated tiresare morelikely to be
cut, punctured or broken
by a sudden
impact such aswhen you hit a pothole.
Keep tiresat the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your
tread isbadly worn,or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
--
0
6-40
!
i
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Certificatioflire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door,shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’recold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has beensitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyonetell you that underinflationor
overinflation is all right.It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can
get the following:
0 Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
0 Bad handling
0 Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much
air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Roughride
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tiresonce a month or more.
Don’t forget yourcompact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tellif your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valvecaps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-41
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires shouldbe rotated every6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 Ism). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Alsocheck for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time
for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement”later in this section for
more information.
Don’t include the compact spare tire
in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown the
on
Certificatioflire label. Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque”
in the Index.
The purpose of regular rotationis to achieve more
uniform wearfor all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the
Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
I
1
When rotating your tires, always use
the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
I
6-42
Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the partsto which
it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose
after atime. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove
any rustor dirt fromplaces where thewheel
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
use a cloth or a papertowel to dothis; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all therust or dirtoff. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the
Index.)
When It’s Time for New Tires
1
1 One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any
of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snaggeddeep
enough to show cordor fabric.
0
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired wellbecause of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and sizeof tires you need, look at
the Certificatioflire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPCSpec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPCSpec number. That way
your vehicle willcontinue to have tires thatare designed
to give properendurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things
during normal service on
your vehicle.If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be
followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having
a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are
the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Mixing tires could causeyou to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-beltedtires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, andyou could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to yourvehicle. Be sure touse the same
size and type tireson allwheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.
If you use bias-ply tires on yourvehicle, the
wheel rim flangescould develop cracksafter
many miles of driving. A tire and/orwheel could
fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-44
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires
by
treadwear, traction andtemperature performance. (This
applies onlyto vehicles sold in the United States.)
The
grades are moldedon the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire QualityGrading system does
not apply todeep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diametersof 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires availableon General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks mayvary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire
Performance Criteria(TPC) standards.
Treadwear
Temperature -- A, B, C
The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditionsof their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistanceto the generationof
heat andits ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the
material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum requiredby law.
Traction
-- A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areA, B,
and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specifiedgovernment test surfacesof asphalt
and concrete.A tire marked C may havepoor
traction performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading,either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on braking (straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not
include cornering (turning) traction.
6-45
I T T ~1Alignment and Tire Balance
me wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced
carefully at the factoryto give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear
or your vehicle pullingone way or the other, the
alignment may needto be reset. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need tobe rebalanced.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you needto replace anyof your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original
equipment parts. Thisway, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
Chevrolet model.
I
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel thatis bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should
be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind
of wheel you need.
6-46
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have a
collision in which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts for replacement.
~
~
NOTICE:
The wrongwheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Indexfor
more information.
1
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
Use tire chainsonly where legaland only when
you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper
size for yourtires. Install
as
them on the front tires and tighten them
tightly as possiblewith the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting yourvehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues,slow down until it
wheels
stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the
with chains onwill damage yourvehicle.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know howit’s been used or
how far it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident.
If you have to replace
a
wheel, use a new GM original equipmentwheel.
6-47
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning productscan be hazardous.aome
are toxic. Otherscan burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part
of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in
a closed space.
When you use anythingfrom a container to clean your
vehicle, be sureto follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors
or
windows when you’re cleaning
the inside.
Never use theseto clean your vehicle:
0 Gasoline
0 Benzene
0 Naphtha
0 Carbon Tetrachloride
0 Acetone
0 Paint Thinner
0 Turpentine
0 Lacquer Thinner
0 Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous-- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use anyof these unless this manualsays you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
0 LaundrySoap
0 Bleach
0 ReducingAgents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get ofriddust and loose
dirt, Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and
Soil
Remover. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from
your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in
the Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:
0 Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0 Clean up stains assoon as you can -- before they set.
0 Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
0 Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area
often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
0 If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediatelyor it will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier.
1. Vacuum and brushthe area to remove any loose dirt.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with awaterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
2. Always clean a whole trim panelor section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label toform thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.Don't
saturate the material anddon't rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you've cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
4. Letdry.
Stains causedby candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains canbe removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Fabric Protection
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed asfollows:
Your vehicle has upholstery that has been treated with
Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It protects
fabrics by repelling oil and water, which are the carriers
of most stains. Even with this protection,
you still need
to cleanyour upholstery often tokeep it looking new.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area withcool water.
Further information on cleaning is availableby calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6 167).
6-49
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have todo it more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean
cloth and a vinyVleather cleaner.
See your dealer
for this product.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water
to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even makeit difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use onlya mild soap and water solution on
a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
6-50
Cleaning the Built-in Child
Restraint Pad
The built-in child restraint padis attached to the seat
frame with fastener strips.
You can remove the pad and
hand wash it with mild soap and water.
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in
Child Restraint Harness
Keep the safety belts
and the built-in child restraint
harness clean and dry.
U
Do not bleach or dye safety belts or the built-in
child restraint harness.If you do, they may be
severely weakened. In a crash, they might not be
able to provide adequate protection. Clean the
safety belts and the child restraint harness only
with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid householdglass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust filmson
interior glass.
Don’t use abrasive cleanerson glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals onthe inside rear
window, since they mayhave to be scraped off later. If
abrasive cleaners are usedon the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary licenseshould not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Clean the outsideof the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, BonAmi@Powder (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder), GM Part
No. 1050011. The
windshield is cleanif beads do not form when you
rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick
to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinsethe blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades thatlook worn.
Weatherstrips
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield, Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
Backglass and Wiper Blades
If the windshieldis not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper
blade chatters
when running, wax, sapor other material may be
on theblade or windshield.
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
six months. During very cold, damp weather
more frequent application may be required.
(See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
6-51
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finishon your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Use lukewarmor cold water, asoft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soap to clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it cleanby washing it often with lukewarmor
cold water.
uccasional waxing or mild polishingof your vehicleby
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays
of the sun.
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Use
from your dealer.(See “Appearance Care and Materials”
liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps. in the Index.)
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
Your vehicle has a “basecoatlclearcoat” paint finish.
dealer. (See “AppearanceCare and Materials”in the
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the
Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
colored
basecoat.
Always
use
waxes
and
polishes that
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to are non-abrasive and madefor a basecoatklearcoat
paint finish.
dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Before you enteran automatic car wash,if your vehicle
is equipped withthe optional power sliding door, be sure
to have the switchfor the power sliding door override
feature enabled.See “Power Sliding Door”in the Index.
High pressure car washes
may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
6-52
I NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoatlclearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirlmarks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar,
tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc.,can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfacesare subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout thatcan take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garagedor covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with soft
a clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheelsis similar tothe painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleanersor
abrasive cleaning brusheson them because you could
damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes.These
brushes canalso damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care
to wipeoff any oversprayor splash from all
painted surfaceson the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage
the paint finish.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, makesure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion materialto the parts repairedor
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
6-53
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures ordeep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away.
Bare metal willcorrode
quickly andmay develop into a major repair expense.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout.Airborne pollutants canfall upon
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle.
This
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-updamage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular
dark spots etched
materials availablefrom your dealer or other service
into the paint surface.
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used forice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody.
If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts suchas fuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials
from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debriscan collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer oran underbody car washing systemcan do
this for you.
6-54
Although no defect in the paint
job causes this,
Chevrolet will repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damagedby this fallout
condition within 12 months or12,000 miles (20000 km)
of purchase, whichever occurs first.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427
1052870
1052918””
1052925
1052929
1052930
12345002
12345721
12345725
12377964
12377966
12377984
I
I
I
I
I
I
SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 0 2 . (0.473 L)
16 02. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
32 oz. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
~~~~
DESCRIPTION
USAGE
Polishing Cloth - Wax Treated
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
~~
Tar and Road Oil Remover
8 oz. (0.237 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
8 oz. (0.237 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
2.5 sq. ft.
12 02. (0.354 L)
16 02. (0.473 L)
16 02. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
II
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Wash Wax Concentrate Cleans and lightly waxes
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, PlexiglasTM , plastic,
Armor All Protectant
rubber and vinyl
Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
Cleaner
and floor mats
Wheel
Cleaner
I
Spray on and rinse with water
I
Armor All Cleaner
Synthetic Chamois
Silicone Tire Shine
Finish Enhancer
Cleaner Wax
Surface Cleaner
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Index.
TM
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils Capture Dry Spot Re
Cleans and shines a variety of surface types
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
** Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
6-55
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside
of the access panel
located on the driver’s sideof the rearof the vehicle.
It’s very helpfulif you ever need to order
parts. On
this labelis:
0 your VIN,
r
n
+1
A
m
A
E N G I N E A k
CODE
MODEL YEAR
ASSEMBLY
PLANT
0model
designation,
the
0
paint information and
This is the legal identifierfor your vehicle.It appears on
a list of all production options and
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
special equipment.
driver’s side.You can see it if you look through the
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
windshield from outside your vehicle.
The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts
labels and the certificates
of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the
engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
6-56
Electrical System
Headlamp Wiring
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The headlamp wiring is protected by
an internal circuit
breaker in theIfP fuse panel. An electrical overload will
cause the lamps togo on and off, or in some cases to
remain off. If this happens, have yourheadlamp wiring
checked right away.
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
The windshield wipermotor is protectedby an internal
circuit breaker anda fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem, be sure to getit fixed.
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
windows and other power accessories. When
the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes,
protecting the circuit untilthe problem is fixed.
Windshield Wipers
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to Circuit breakersin the ID?fuse panel protect the power
6-57
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuitsin your vehicle are protected from
short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links.
Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse.If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you
replace a bad fuse witha new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever havea problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has the same
amperage or use one
of the spare fuses in the underhood
fuse and relay center. Just pick some feature
of your
vehicle thatyou can get along without-- like the radio
or cigarette lighter-- and use its fuse, if it is the right
amperage. Replace it assoon as you can.
There are twofuse blocks inyour vehicle: the
instrument panelfuse block and the underhood fuse
and relay center.
6-58
Instrument Panel FuseBlock
The instrument panel
fuse block is to the right
of the glove box. Pull the
door open to access the
instrument panelfuse block.
Fuses
FUSE USAGE CHART
CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
BACKLIGHT
SWC
RH TLP
PRNDL
ELEC
swc
LH TILP
RR FOG LP
SOLABS
RR ELC
DEFOG
PWR MIRROR
ClGARiDLC
FRT PWR S C U
CRUISE
TBIG
SIR
IGN 1
PWR am VENT
RR HVAC
FRT HVAC Low’
MED BLWR
SUNROOF
FRT W R N S H R
SWC
ACCY
MALURADIO/DIC
I
HAZARD
I
DRL
1
CAN VENTSOL
RH HEADLP
LOW
I
I
I
ABSflCS IGN
For More Information, See Owner’s Manual
Printed in
BCM PRGRM
I
LH HEADLP
LOW LAMP
I
HVACIDRL
RR WPR
WSHR
I
I
I
I-
CTSY
LAMP
I
I
PCM
/
/
Circuit Breakers
HEADLAMP
PWR W D O m
VENT
PWR SEATPSD
FRT HVAC/HI
BLWR
DRL Control Module,
Headlamp and UP
Dimmer Switch
Front Power Windows
6-Way Power Seat(s) andRear
Side Door Actuator Motor
Blower Motor Hi Speed Relay
in Module
Steering WheelRadio Control
BACKLIGHT
Switches (Illumination)
ELEC PRNDL
Instrument Cluster to
PRNDL Indicators
PWR MIRROR
Power Remote Control
Mirror Switch
CRUISE
Cruise Control Module, Switch
and Release Switch
PWRQTRVENTInterior
Lamps and
Multifunction Switch
(Power Vent Switch)
FRT W P W S H R
Windshield Wiperwasher
Motor and Switch
PWR LOCK
BCM
Not Used
RH T L P
RR FOG LP
Not Used
CIGAR/DLC
Cigarette Lighter and Data Link
Connector (DLC)
T/SIG
Turn Signal Switch
Fuses
RR HVAC
SWC ACCY
HAZARD
RR PWR SCKT
DRL
LH T L P
RR DEFOG
FRT PWR SCKT
SIR
Rear Blower Motor,Rear
Heater-NC Control,
and Temperature Door
Actuator (Rear)
Steering Wheel Radio
Control Switches
Turn Signal Switch
CAN VENTSOL
Rear Electric Accessory
Plug Housing
DRL Control Module
ELC
Not Used
Rear Window Defogger Relay
Front Electric Accessory
Plug Housing
Inflatable Restraint
Control Module
Heater-A/C Control
CTSY LAMP
IGN 1
FRT HVAC
LOWMED BLWR
MALL/RADIO/DIC BCM, Driver Information
Display, Radio and Radio Rear
Speaker Amplifier
6-60
Fuses
STOP LAMP
ABS MOD BATT
SUNROOF
Stoplamp Switch toStoplamps
Electronic Brake Control
ModuleElectronic Brake
Traction ControlModule
(EBCMEBTCM)
Evaporative Emissions(EVAP)
Canister Vent Solonoid Valve
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Air Compressor and ELC
Relay, Trailer Harness
BCM
ALC Sensor, BCM, Electronic
Brake Control Indicator Lamp
Driver Module, Instrument
Panel Cluster,Rear Window
Wipermasher and
Multifunction Switch (Fog
Lamp SwitcWTraction Control
Switch) and Stoplamp/Torque
Converter Clutch (TCC)Switch
Sunroof Control Module
Fuses
RR WPR WSHR
Underhood Fuse and Relay Center
Rear Window Wiper Motor,
Rear Window Wipermasher
and Multifunction Switch (Rear
Window Wipermasher Switch)
LH HEADLP LOW Not Used
LH HEADLP HIGH Not Used
ABS/TCS
IGN
Electronic
Brake
Control
ModuleElectronic Brake
Traction ControlModule
(EBCMEBTCM)
ABS SOL
LH and RH Front Brake
Solenoid Valve
HVACDRL
Air Inlet Actuator, DRL Control
Module, Heater-A/C Control,
Temperature Door Actuator
(Front) and Rear Window
Defogger Relay
BCM
PRGRM
Body
Control
Module
(BCM)
RH HEADLP LOW Not Used
RH HEADLP HIGH Not Used
PCM
IGN MAIN
Relay
and PCM
This fuse and relay center
is located in the engine
compartment, in frontof the windshield washer
fluid reservoir.
The fuses marked spare are available
if a replacement
fuse is needed.
6-61
Maxi Fuse
5-IGN MAIN 1
Ignition Switch to Fuses (VP):
ABS/TCS IGN, CRUISE, DRL,
ELEC PRNDL, IGN1, PSD, SIR,
T/SIG and PCM [IGN MAIN
Relay (Underhood Electrical
Center Fuses:A/C CLU, ELEK
IGN, IGN l-U/H, INJ, TCC)]
6-COOL FAN 1
CoolantFans
7-BATT MAIN 1 Fuses (UP):ABS MOD BATT,
CIGARDLC, CTSY LAMP, FRT
PWR SCKT, PWR LOCK, PWR
MIRROR and RR PWR SCKT
8-IGN MAIN 2
Maxi Fuse
1-COOL FAN 2
Coolant Fans
3-HEADLAMPS Circuit Breakers: FRT HVAC HI
BLWR, and HEADLAMP Fuses
(UP):HAZARD and STOPLAMP
4-BATT MAIN 2 Circuit Breaker: PWR SEATPSD.
Fuses (VP):ELC and RR DEFOG
6-62
Ignition Switch to Fuses (VP):
BCM PRGRM, FRT HVAC
LOWMED BLWR, FRT
W P W S H R , HVACDRL,
MALL/RADIO/DIC, PWR
QRT VENT, RR HVAC, RR
W P W S H R , SUNROOF,
SWC ACCY and PWR WDO
Circuit Breaker
Mini Relays
Mini Fuse
9-COOL FANRHFAN
1, LH FAN 2
21-IGN1-UH
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP)
Canister Purge Valve, Heated
Oxygen Sensors 1 and 2, Mass Air
Flow (MAF) Sensor
22-SPARE
Not Used
23-SPARE
Not Used
24-SPARE
Not Used
25-ELEK IGN
Ignition Control Module (ICM)
26-SPARE
Not Used
27-Bh-J LAMP
Transaxle Range Switch to
Back-up Lamps
28-NC CLU
A/C CLU Relay to A/C
Compressor Clutch Oil
29-RADIO
Driver Information Display,
Heater A/C Control, Radio, Rear
Side DoorActuator Control
Motor, Remote Control Door
Lock Receiver (RCDLR), Security
Indicator Lamp andTheft
Deterrent Shock Sensor
10-COOL FAN 2 LH FAN 2
11-1GN MAIN
FUSES: A/C CLU, IGN l-U/H,
INS, ELEK IGN, TCC
12-COOL FAN 1 RH FAN 1, LH FAN 2
Micro Relays
13-AIC CLU
A/C Clutch
14-FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
15-FFMP SPDNotUsed
cow
16-HORN
Horn
17-FOG LAMP
LH Fog Lamp, RH Fog Lamp,
Fog Lamp Indicator
Mini Fuse
18-INJ
Fuel Injectors 1-6
19-SPARE
Not Used
20-SPARE
Not Used
6-63
Replacement Bulbs
Mini Fuse
30-ALT SENSE
Generator
3 1-TCC
Automatic Transaxle (Torque
Converter Clutch Solenoids)
Stoplamp Switch to PCM
32-FUELPUMPFuelPumpRelay
33-ECMSENSE
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
34
Not Used
35-FOG LP
Fog Lamp Relay
36-HORN
Horn Relay
37-PARK LP
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Control Module, Headlamps
and I/P Dimmer Switch
Theft-Deterrent Relay
to Headlamps
38
Not Used
39
Not Used
40
Mini Fuse Puller
Exterior Lamps
NumberBulb
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9004-HBI
Front ParkingRurn
Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 3157NA or 3157 NAK
Front Sidemarker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Stop/Tail(Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Signal (2nd from top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3156
Back-up Lamps (3rd from top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3156
Tail (Bottom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in
English and metric conversions.
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants”
in the Index for more information.
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement . . . . . 8 quarts (7.5 L)
Cooling System
With A/C ....................
9.6 quarts (9.1 L)
With Rear Climate Control or
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 quarts (11.3 L)
Engine Crankcase Oil and
Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
Fuel Capacity
StandardRegular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 0 gallons (76 L)
OptionaVExtended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5 gallons (95 L)
Refrigerant, Air Conditioning* . . See Refrigerant
Label under the hood.
-
Tire Pressures, Sizes
...........
See Tire-Loading
Information label
on driver’s door.
100 lb-ft (140 N-m)
Wheel Nut Torque ..........
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . 1 gallon (0.37 L)
*See Air Conditioning Refrigerants later in
this section.
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When
adding, be sure tofill to the appropriate level, as
recommended inthis manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E
EngineType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-3-4-5-6
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Thermostat Temperature
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195“F (91“C)
6-65
I . ’
*
Vehicle Dimensions- Regular
Wheel Base
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186.9 inches (474.6 cm)
72 inches (183 cm)
Width ......................
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67.4 inches(17 1.2 cm)
Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 inches (284.5 cm)
Front Tread Width . . . . . . . . . 6 1.5 inches (1 56.2
cm)
Rear Tread Width . . . . . . . . . . 63.3 inches ( 160.8 cm)
Vehicle Dimensions- Extended
Wheel Base
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.9 inches (510.2 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 inches (183 cm)
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68.1 inches (172.9 cm)
Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 inches (304.7 cm)
Front Tread Width . . . . . . . . . 61.5 inches (156.2 cm)
Rear Tread Width. . . . . . . . . . 63.3 inches (160.8 cm)
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type A- 1208C
Passenger Compartment Air Filter (2) . . . . 52470574
PF47
Engine Oil Filter ........................
SparkPlugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41-940
Gap: 0.060 inches (1.5 mm)
Windshield Wiper Blades
24 inches (60 cm)
Length .....................
Type .........................
Shepard’s Hook
Backglass Wiper Blade
Length ....................
16 inches (40.6 cm)
Type .........................
Shepard’s Hook
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerantsare the same.
If the air conditioning systemin your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant
is used. If
you’re not sure, ask your dealer.
k%
NOTES
6-67
@% NOTES
6-68
0Section 7
MaintenanceSchedule
This section covers the maintenancerequired for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these servicesto retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-4
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
How This Section is Organized
Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServices
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
7-4
7-29
7-33
7-34
7-36
Selecting the Right Schedule
Part B: Owner Checks andServices
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-1
Introduction
I
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
I
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. Seeyour
Warranty and Owner Assistancebooklet, or your
Chevrolet dealerfor details.
7-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps
to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the qualityof the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehiclein good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this section isdivided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServices’’ shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified andhave the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s servicedepartment or another qualified
service centerdo these jobs.
Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the requiredknow-how
and the propertools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, havequalified
a
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services”tells
you what should be checked and when.
It also explains
what you can easilydo to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your dealer’s
service department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists
some recommended products to help keep your vehicle
properly maintained.These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you
do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for
you to record themaintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed,
be
sure to writeit down in this part.This will help you
determine when your next maintenance shouldbe done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle
for
warranty repairs.
If you are skilledenough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications”in
the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. Butwe don’t know
exactly how you’ll driveit. You may drive very short
distances onlya few times a week. Or
you may drive
long distances allthe time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or
you
may drive it to work, to do errandsor in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways
people use their
vehicles, maintenance needsvary. You may even need
more frequent checks and
replacements than you’ll find
in the schedulesin this section. So please read this
section and notehow you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and whenyou should schedule them. If you
go to your dealerfor your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trainedand supported service people will
perform the work usinggenuine GM parts.
7-4
The proper fluids and lubricants
to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicleuses
these. All parts should be replaced andall necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
cany passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certificatioflire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel.See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to
decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Maintenance Schedule
I Short
Trip/City
Definition
1
Follow the ShortTripKity Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions is truefor your vehicle:
Most trips are less than5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 krn).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
0
0
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Short TripKity Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10000 km): Chassis Lubrication
(or 6 months, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation.
Every 12,000 Miles(20 000 km): Passenger
Compartment Air Filter Replacement.
Most trips are through dusty areas.
Every 15,000 Miles(25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions.
You frequently tow a traileror use a carrieron top of
your vehicle.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement.
If the vehicle isused for delivery service, police, taxi
or othercommercial application.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km):Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditionsonly).
Every 60,000 Miles (100000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines
Inspection (or every60 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
(Continued)
One of the reasonsyou should follow this scheduleif
you operate your vehicle under anyof these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down soonex
U
F
' I-3
Maintenance Schedule
I Short TripKity Intervals
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to followthe complete maintenance schedule on
thefollowing pages.
Follow this maintenance scheduleonly if none of the
conditions from the Short TripKity Maintenance
Schedule is true. Do not use this schedule if the vehicle
is used for trailer towing, driven ina dusty area or used
off paved roads. Use the ShortTripKity schedule for
these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with afully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slower:
Long Tripmighway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every12 months, whichever occursfirst).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Tire Rotation,
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Passenger
Compartment Air Filter Replacement.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. FuelTank, Cap and Lines
Inspection (or every60 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 100,000 Miles(166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles(240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on
thefollowing pages.
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in thisschedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after100,000 miles
(166 000km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km)should be performed at
the same interval after150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
# Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage, transaxle
shift linkage, parkingbrake cable guides and the
underbody contact points and linkage.
+ A good
time tocheck your brakesis during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections’’ in PartC of this schedule.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board hasdetermined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however,
urge that allrecommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance
be recorded.
7-7
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
DATE
I
DATE
1
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
6,000 Miles (I 0 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components(or every 6 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
17 Change engine oil and filter (or
every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-8
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect
cleaner
air
filteryou
if
are
driving
dusty
inconditions.
necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
Replace filter if
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
I
DATE
SERVICED B Y
MILEAGE
ACTUAL
I
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I DATE
MILEAGE
ACTUAL
I
I SERVICEDBY I
~~
I SERVICED BY:
I
I
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule
I
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
17 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartmentair filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
SERVICED BY:
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
7-10
I DATE
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
I DATE
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
MILEAGE
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
I
I
MILEAGE
42,000 Miles (70000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission ControlService.
MILEAGE
(Continued)
7-11
I
ShortTrip/CityMaintenanceSchedule
I
42,000 Miles (70 000 km) (Continued)
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect air cleanerfilter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filterif necessary.
An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote“f)
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every
6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
MILEAGE
1
I SERVICEDBY: I
1
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or moreof these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
I
DATE
1
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
SERVICED BY:
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs fiist).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
7-13
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
0 Change engine oil andfilter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components(or every 6 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote#.)
Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect fuel tank, capand lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Rotate tires.See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
7-14
DATE
MILEAGE
DATE
MILEAGE
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
63,000 Miles (105000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
SERVICED BY:
LATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Index for proper
17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
MILEAGE
I
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
(Continued)
7-15
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
72,000 Miles (120 000 km) (Continued)
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occursfirst),
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartmentair filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
Cl Change engine oil andfilter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission ControlService.
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
El Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components(or every 6 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
7-16
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I DATE
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145000 km)
I DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
7-17
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
DATE
I
I DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Sewice.
Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
93,000 Miles (155 000 kin)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
7-18
1 DATE
I
ShortTrip/CityMaintenanceSchedule
I
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission ControlService.
17 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission ControlService.
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city trafficwhere the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under anyof these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
I DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICED BY:
DATE
MILEAGE
7-19
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill coolingsystem (or every60 months since last service,
whichever occursfirst). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index
for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission ControlSewice.
7-20
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I SERVICED BY:
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in thisschedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000miles
(166 000 lun) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
# Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage, transaxle
shift linkage, parking brakecable guides and the
underbody contact points and linkage.
+ A good time tocheck your
brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in PartC of this schedule.
Footnotes
? The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California AirResources Board hasdetermined that the
failure to perform thismaintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however,
urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals
and the maintenance
be recorded.
7-21
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”
in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote#.)
7-22
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
SERVICED BY:
I
d
SERVICED BY:
I LongTripmighwayMaintenance
Schedule
I
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
37,500Miles (62 500 km)
1
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
17 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index forproper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
7-23
I LongTripMighwayMaintenance
Schedule
I
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
DATE
I
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic wherethe outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under anyof these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
7-24
MILEAGE
I Long TripmighwayMaintenanceSchedule I
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
13 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission ControlService.
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuelcap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
I
I
I DATE
I
MILEAGE
7-25
I Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule I
~~~
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components(or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
7-26
DATE
I
MILEAGE
DATE
I
MILEAGE
I DATE
I
?
Long
Trip/Highway
Maintenance
Schedule
17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter.
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission ControlService.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
+
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
SERVICED BY:
I
An Emission ControlService.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
7-27
I LongTripmfghwayMaintenance
Schedule
I
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
DATE
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
MILEAGE
An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission ControlService.
0 Change automatic transaxlefluid and filter if the vehicle ismainly driven
under one or moreof these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
I f you do not useyour vehicle under anyof these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
I DATE
0 Drain, flush and refill coolingsystem (or every60 months since last service,
I
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-28
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY I
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed beloware owner checks and services which
should be performed atthe intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependabilityand emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level
in the
windshield washer tank and add the
proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in
the Index
for further details.
Be sure anynecessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever anyfluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in
Part D.
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
pe@orm these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and addthe proper oilif
necessary. See “Engine Oil” inthe Index for
further details.
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
See
“Tires” in theIndex for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck.Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL’
coolant mixture if necessary.See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for hrther details.
7-29
At Least Twicea Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and
all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly.If your vehicle has a built-in child
restraint, also periodically make sure the harness straps,
latch plates, buckle, clip, child head restraint and
anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child restraint
system parts. If you see anything that might keepa
safety beltor built-in child restraint system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts or harness straps replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced.
(The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear
or cracking. Replace blade
inserts thatappear worn or damaged or that streak or
m i s s areas of the windshield.Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
7-30
Automatic Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add ifneeded. See
“Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.A fluid loss may
indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate thekey lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified inPart D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges, including the liftgate.
Also lubricate all hinges and latches, including those
for
the hood, power slidingdoor cable, rear compartment,
glove box door and any folding seat hardware.Part D
tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
1A
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use me accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turnoff the engine immediatelyif it starts.
Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock(BTT”’1 Check
A CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sureyou have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Indexif necessary).
NOTE: Be readyto apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear.The starter
to the RUN
3. With the engine off, turn the key
should work only in PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N). If
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the starter works in any other position, your vehicle
the regular brake,try to move the shift lever out
of
needs service.
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
7-31
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and withthe parking brake set,try to turn
LOCK in each shift lever position.
the ignition key to
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
set the
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With
(N),
the engine running and transaxle NEUTRAL
in
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
by the parking
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
brake only.
The key should turn toLOCK only when the shift
lever isin PARK (P).
The key should comeout only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePARK (P)
Me -:-anism Check
A CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could beginto move. You or others could be
injured andproperty could be damaged.Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake atonce shouldthe vehicle beginto move.
7-32
0
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water flush
to any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into
the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index.
Listed below are inspections and services which should be
performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring
and fall). You should let your dealer’s service department
or other qualijied service centerdo these jobs. Make sure
any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Proper procedures to perform these services may
be
found in a service manual.See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive A:
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced
if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings
and clamps; replaceas needed. Clean the outsideof the
radiator and air conditioning condenser.To help ensure
of the cooling system and
proper operation, a pressure test
pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
Throttle System Inspection
3
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system
of wear or lack
for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs
of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for
damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.
Inspect the throttle systemfor interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear.Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines
and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
Exhaust System Inspection
condition. Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel
the exhaust system.Look for broken, damaged,missing or
cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
out-of-position parts as well asopen seams, holes, loose
brake adjustment.You may need to have your brakes
connections or other conditions which could cause a heat inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions
result in frequent braking.
-
mm
7-53
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified belowby name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine
Oil
Engine
Oil
with
the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity.To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil”in the Index.
EngineCoolant
7-34
50/50 mixture of cleanwater
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM Goodwrench@DEX-COOL@
or Havoline@DEX-COOL@
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant”in
the Index.
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme l l @Brake Fluid
System
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirementsof
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Automatic
Transaxle
DEXRON@-111Automatic
Transmission fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
USAGE
Chassis
Lubrication
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirementsof
NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM Optikleen@ Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate@ Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Rear Folding
Seat, Fuel Door
Hinge, Liftgate
Hinges, Power
Sliding Door
Cable
Multi-PuoseLubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Sliding Door
Track
Lubriplate@- Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
%
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled servicesare performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed the service
in the boxes provided afterthe maintenance interval.
Any additional informationfrom “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-36
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Maintenance Record
7-37
Maintenance Record
7-38
I
Maintenance Record
1
I
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-40
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you willfind out how to contact Chevroletif you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how
to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistancefor Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
8- 10
8- 10
8-11
8-11
8-11
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects tothe United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Chevrolet dealers have the facilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date information to promptly address any
concerns you may have. However, ifa concern has not
been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern witha member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
If the matter has
be quickly resolved at that level.
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the
general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020. InCanada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa bycalling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish)
For help outsideof the United States and Canada, call
the following numbersas appropriate:
0
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0 122
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-13 15
In other overseas locations, call GM Overseas
Distribution Corporation in Canada at:
(905) 644-4112.
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
8-3
For prompt assistance, please have the following
information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
0
0
0
0
0
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at
the topleft of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle deliverydate and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However,if you wish to write
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 ColonelSam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-4
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel.
That iswhy we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Customer Assistancefor Text
Telephone (TTY)Users
To assist customers who aredeaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. AnyTTY user can communicatewith
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY usersin
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance Program
a day,
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
a
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to
nationwide networkof dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membershipis Eree, however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levelsof service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy’” Care:
Toll-free number, 1 -800-CHEV-USA
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (Le.,
wrecker services,locksmithkey service, glass
repair, etc.)
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 1998 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance isfree.
8-5
ROADSIDE Courtesy
0
TM
Cure PROVIDES:
Roadside Basic Cure services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
0
0
0
FREE LocksmiWKey Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
FREE Jump Start (at homeor on the road)
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offeredin conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasersof 1998 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Note: Courtesy Cure is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 1998 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
000 km),
for a periodof 3 years/36,000 miles (60
whichever occurs first.All Courtesy Cure services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
Service Management.
Basic Cure and Courtesy Cure are not partof or
included in the coverage providedby the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reservesthe right to
modify or discontinue Basic Cure and Courtesy Care
at any time.
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer Please referto the Roadside Assistance brochure
inside your owner information portfolio for
full
to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
program details.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When Canadian Roadside Assistance
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
Vehicles purchased in Canada have
an extensive
any payment obligations that may be incurred
for
from anywhere
Roadside Assistance program accessible
utilizing outside services.
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
For prompt assistance when calling, please have
the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
following available togive to the advisor:
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
0 Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
0
License plate number
0
Vehicle color
0
Vehicle location
0
Telephone number where you can be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
0
Description of problem
8-7
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverageprovided by
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to retailpurchasers of 1998 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks (please seeyour selling dealer
for details).
Courtesy Transportation includes:
One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
completed during the sameday.
0
0
0
Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
for any overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR
Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other
transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any
overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR
Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by
another person (i.e., fi-iend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of
rental for any overnight warranty repair up to five days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by your Chevrolet dealer
service management. Claim amountsshould
reflect all actual costs.
8-8
Chevrolet Courtesy Transportation is not part of the
Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
without notification.
0 For additional program details, contact your
Chevrolet dealer.
Some stateinsurance regulations make itimpractical to
rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are
under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet
will reimburse up to $30/day for documented
transportation you receive.
For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle
Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Pleaseconsult your
dealer for details. The RoadsideAssistance program is
available only in the United States and Canada.
0
In Canada,please consult your GM dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation.
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute ResolutionProgram
This program is available in all50 states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information booklet
for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reservesthe right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its
participation in this program.
Both Chevroletand your Chevrolet dealer are committed
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that, ifa situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier inthis section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation
of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
in
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates
BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, youmay contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statementof the natureof your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you
TO THE UNITED STATES
may contact theBBB at any time.The BBB will attempt
GOVERNMENT
to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary. If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could
be scheduled where eligible customers may present their cause a crashor could cause injury or death, you should
case toan impartial third-party arbitrator.
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
accept or reject.If you accept the decision,GM will be
notifying General Motors.
bound by that decision.The entire dispute resolution
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
procedure should ordinarily take about40 days from the
in
investigation, andif it finds that a safety defect exists
time you file a claim until a decision
is made.
a groupof vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
Some state lawsmay require you to use this program
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration programin individual problems between you, your dealer or
or in thecourts. For further information, contact the
General Motors.
BBB at 1-800-955-5 100or the Chevrolet Customer
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020.
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Warranty Information
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
8-10
In Canada, pleasecall us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or,write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
has a safetydefect, you should immediately notify
Oshawa,
OntarioLlH 8P7
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario KlG 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA
(or Transport Canada)
in a situationlike this, we certainly hopeyou’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020or write:
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service
literature are available for purchase for all current and
past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone numberfor ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
8-11
1998 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing
of your vehicle can be purchased by filling
out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing
it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR1998 CHEVROLET
OWNER’S INFORMATION
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
electrical, steering, body, etc.
Schedule forall models.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$90.00
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1998 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$15.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Publications are available for current and past
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the
diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN-ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE ANDMAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
OR ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:oO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discr)
Orders will be mailed within
1O-days of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service. If further Information IS needed, write to the address s own below or call
with return
1-800-782-4356. Material cannot be returned for credit withoutslip
packing
information within 30 daysof delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee maybe applied
against the original order.
ORDER TOLL FREE
s,
(NOTE: For Credit Card HoldersOn&)
1-800-782-4356
(Mondav-Fridav8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST 1
FAXOrderi Onlv 1-313-865-5927
9
9.
8
Manual
Repair
Service
Car & Light Truck
Transmission
Unit
Manual
1998
Owner’s
Portfolio
$40.00
1998
In
$15.00
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio
1998
$1 0.00
G
:M
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the Cbe& or Money
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Order payableto
Mail completed order form to:
Helm, Jnc. (USA funds
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
only do nof send cash.)
For purchases outsideU.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
-
4
Mastercard
VISA
I -1
0
I
(STREET ADDRESS-NO
n
(ATTENTION)
(CUSTOMER’S
NAME)
P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
(STATE)
0
AREA CODE
T
(ZIP CODE)
~~
GM-CHE-ORD98 *(Prices are subject
to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
I
L
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted
In U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable U.S.
in funds. To cover Canadian postage, add
$11.50 plus the
US. order processing.
b% NOTES
8-14
0 Section 9
Index
Accessory Inflator System .......................
2-78
2-80
Accessory Power Outlet ..........................
Adding Equipment to the OutsideOf Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3
Adjusting the Bucket Seats .......................
1-27
1- 19
Adjusting the Split Bench Seat ....................
1-50
Air Bag .......................................
1-55
How Does it Restrain ..........................
1-52
Howitworks ................................
1-52
Location ....................................
1.52.2.87
Readiness Light .........................
1-58
Servicing ...................................
1-50
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-55
What Makes it Inflate ..........................
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
1-54
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
AirConditioning ................................
Air Conditioning Refrigerants .....................
6-66
Air Filter Replacement. Passenger Compartment . . . . . . 6-16
AirInflator ....................................
2-78
6-46
Alignment and Balance. Tire ......................
6-53
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning ......................
3-32
Antenna. Integrated Windshield ....................
6-21
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock
Brakes ......................................
4-7
Brake SystemWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89, 4-7
6-48
AppearanceCare ...............................
6-55
Appearance Care Materials .......................
2-77
Ashtray .......................................
3-9
Audio Systems ..................................
2-6
Automatic Door Locks ............................
2-32
Automatic Overdrive ............................
7-30
Automatic Transaxle Check .......................
6-18
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ........................
6-20
HOW toAdd .................................
6-18
Howtocheck ...............................
6-18
When to Check and Change .....................
2-30
Automatic Transaxle Operation ....................
2-30
Shifting .....................................
Automatic Transaxle Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Battery ......................................
6-30
Jump Starting .................................
5-3
5.3. 5.5
Warnings ................................
BatterySaver ..................................
2-65
8-9
BBB Auto Line .................................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................
4-23
Better Business Bureau Mediation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Blizzard ......................................
4-28
9-1
1
Brake
Adjustment ..................................
6-30
6-26
Fluid .......................................
6-26
Master Cylinder ..............................
2-34
Parking .....................................
6-30
PedalTravel .................................
6-30
Replacing System Parts ........................
2-87. 6-27
System Warning Light ....................
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Transaxle Shift Interlock .......................
2-37
Transaxle Shift Interlock Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 1
Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Brakes. Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Braking ........................................
4-6
4-10
Braking in Emergencies ..........................
2-25
Break-In, New Vehicle ..........................
BTSI .........................................
2-37
7-31
BTSICheck ...................................
Bucketseats ...................................
1-26
Adjusting ...................................
1-27
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1-28
Removing ...................................
Replacing ...................................
1-30
6-3 1
Bulb Replacement ..............................
Canadian Roadside Assistance ....................
8-7
Capacities and Specifications ......................
6-65
1-33
Captain’s Chairs ................................
1-33
Removing ...................................
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
CarbonMonoxide ....................
2.38.4.29. 4.37
CargoNet .....................................
2-72
9-2
Cassette Deck Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12.3-15
3-30
Cassette Tape Player Care ........................
3-14. 3-19
CD Adapter Kits ..........................
CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature ................. 3-26
2-64
Center Dome Lamp .............................
Center Rear Passenger Position (Bench Seat) . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Center Rear Passenger Position (Bucket Seat). . . . . . . . . 1-66
Certificatioflire Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-37
Chains.Safety .................................
6-47
Chains.Tire ...................................
5-24
Changing a Flat Tire.............................
Charging System Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101
6-54
Chemical Paint Spotting ..........................
1-68
Children ......................................
1-82
ChildRestraints ................................
Built-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
Cleaning Built-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position. . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position
1-93
(Bucketseat) ...............................
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position
(Third Row Bench Seat) ......................
1-91
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-95
TopStrap ...................................
1-88
1-86. 1-87
Where to Put ...........................
CigaretteLighter ...............................
2-77
6-58
Circuit Breakers and Fuses .......................
Cleaner.Air ...................................
6-15
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ............................
6-53
Built-in Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6-49
Fabric ......................................
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-51
6-48
Inside of Your Vehicle .........................
InstrumentPanel .............................
6-50
6-52
Outside of Your Vehicle ........................
6-49
Special Problems .............................
6-49
Stains ......................................
6-53
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
Wheels .....................................
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6-51
WiperBlades ................................
3-2
Climate Control System ...........................
3-9
Clock, Settingthe ................................
Coinholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-70
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-31
Compact Disc Care .............................
3-19
Compact Disc Player ............................
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-22,3-25
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
Remote .....................................
2-67
Compact Overhead Console ......................
5-34
Compact Spare Tire .............................
2-23
ContentTheft-Deterrent .........................
Control of a Vehicle ..............................
4-6
Convenience Net
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
6-21
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
Adding .....................................
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
2-29
Heater, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RecoveryTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18
6-22
Whattouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Courtesy Transportation ...........................
8-8
CruiseControl .................................
2-56
2-70
Cupholders ....................................
Customer Assistancefor Text Telephone Users . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ....................
Damage. Finish ...............................
6-54
6-53
Damage. Sheet Metal ............................
2-61
Damme Running Lamps .........................
5-3
DeadBattery ...................................
8-10
Defects. Reporting Safety ........................
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
3-5
Defogger.RearWindow ..........................
3-4
Defogging .....................................
3-4
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-63
Delayed Illumination ............................
6-66
Dimensions,Vehicle ............................
Door
2-96
AjarLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Power Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Driver Information Center ........................
2-98
1-41
DriverPosition .................................
1-2
Driver’s Four-Way Manual Seat ....................
Driving
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-2
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-22
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
In Foreign Countries ...........................
9-3
Driving (Continued)
IntheRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
On Curves .................................. 4- 11
On Grades While Towing a Trailer ............... 4-40
On Hill and Mountain Roads .................... 4-24
OnSnowandIce ............................. 4-26
Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
WithaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Dump and Stow Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
2-28
Electrical Equipment. Adding ....................
Electrical System ............................... 6-57
Electronic Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Coolant Heater ............................... 2-29
Coolant Level Check .......................... 7-29
Coolant Temperature Gage ..................... 2-9 1
CoolingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
Overheated Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 13
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
StartingYour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95. 6.11
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
What Kind to Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
WhentoAdd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
When to Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Equipment. Adding to the Outside Of Your Vehicle ..... 6-3
Exhaust. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
ExitLighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Fabric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49
Fan Knob. Climate Control System .................. 3-2
Filling a Portable Fuel Container....................
6-7
FillingYourTank ................................
6-5
Filter. Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Filter. Passenger Compartment Replacement . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Finishcare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Finish Damage ................................. 6-54
FirstGear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Flashers. Hazard Warning ......................... 5-2
Flat Tire. Changing ............................. 5-24
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Fluids and Lubricants ............................ 7-34
Folding Driver’s Seatback ......................... 1-3
Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
FrenchLanguageManual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ii
FrontDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Front ParkingEurn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement. . . . 6-34
Front Seat Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
9-4
.
.
.
Front Seat Storage Net ...........................
2-71
Front Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement
. . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
.
Front Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
6-5
Filling Your Tank ..............................
2-97
Gage .......................................
In Foreign Countries ...........................
6-5
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .......................
6-58
en
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 1
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-97
2-85
Speedometer .................................
Garage Door Opener Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
GAWR .......................................
4-31
Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
2-66
GloveBox ....................................
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30..
11
Guide Franpis .................................
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Halogen Bulbs ................................
6-31
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
HeadRestraints .................................1-6
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Bulb Replacement ............................
6-3 1
HighLow Beam Changer ......................
2-54
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Heating ........................................
High-BeamHeadlamps ..........................
Highway Hypnosis ..............................
Hill and Mountain Roads .........................
Hitches. Trailer .................................
Hood
Checking Things Under .........................
Prop ........................................
Release ......................................
Horn .........................................
Hydroplaning ..................................
3-4
2-54
4-24
4-24
4-36
6-8
6-9
6-8
2-52
4-20
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check .................... 7-32
2-62
Illuminated Entry ...............................
Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Inflator.Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
Inspections
7-33
Brake System ................................
7-33
ExhaustSystems .............................
Front Drive Axle Boot .........................
7-33
7-33
Front Drive Axle Seal .........................
7-33
Radiator and Heater Hose ......................
7-33
Steering ....................................
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Throttle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
InstrumentPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
6-50
Cleaning ....................................
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Light Intensity Control ......................... 2-61
Instrument Panel Switchbank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 13
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
2-6 1
Control .....................................
Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
Jack.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
K e y Lock Cylinders Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
BatteryReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Resynchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Labels
CertificatiodTire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Tire-LoadingInformation ......................
4-30
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Lamps
Delayed Illumination ..........................
2-63
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
ExitLighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
2-60
Exterior ....................................
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
2-64
Rearcargo ..................................
6-11
Underhood ..................................
Leaving Your Vehicle ............................. 2-7
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running ....... 2-36
2-20
Liftgate .......................................
2-77
Lighter .......................................
Lights
1.52. 2.87
Air Bag Readiness .......................
.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89. 47
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.87.6.27
Charging System Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
DoorAjar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Low Coolant Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92, 6-23
2-97
Low Fuel Warning ............................
2-96, 6-11
Low Oil Level ..........................
2-91, 4-9
Low Traction ............................
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Power Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
1-36, 2-86
Safety Belt Reminder .....................
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Traction Control System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90, 4-10
4-30
Loading YourVehicle ...........................
Locks
2-6
Automatic Door ...............................
Cylinders ...................................
7-30
2-4
Door ........................................
7-32
Ignition Transaxle Check .......................
7-30
Key Lock Cylinder Service .....................
Last Door Closed Locking .......................
2-6
LockoutDeterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-5
PowerDoor ..................................
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-19
Sliding Door Child Security.....................
Sliding Door Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-40
Locks and Lighting Choices ......................
9-6
.
_._-___-
.
LossofControl ................................
4-15
Low Coolant Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.92.6.23
2-97
Low Fuel Warning Light .........................
2.96.6.11
Low Oil Level Light .......................
2.91.4.9
Low Traction Light .........................
7-34
Lubricants and Fluids ............................
7-30
Lubrication Service. Body ........................
2-74
Luggage Carrier ................................
1-6
Lumbar Control .................................
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
7-36
MaintenanceRecord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 1
How This Section is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Long Tiip/Highway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-6
Long Tripklighway Intervals .....................
7-29
Owner Checks and Services .....................
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-5
Short Trip/City Definition .......................
7-5
Short Trip/City Intervals ........................
Your Vehicle and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
6-54
Maintenance. Underbody .........................
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ......................
2-93
Matching Transmitters toYour Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 10
2-65
Mirrors .......................................
2-66
Convex Outside ..............................
Inside Daymight Rearview .....................
2-65
2-65
Power Remote Control .........................
Visorvanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-78
ModeButtons.ClimateControlSystem
. . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Mode Knob. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
4-24
Mountain Roads ................................
2-53
Multifunction Lever ...........................
N e t . cargo ...................................
Neutral .......................................
New Vehicle “Break-In” .........................
Nightvision ...................................
2-72
2-31
2-25
4-17
2-85
Odometer ....................................
2-85
Odometer. Trip .................................
4-13
Off-RoadRecovery .............................
2.95.6.11
Oil. Engine ...............................
2-95
Oil Pressure Light ..............................
2-67
OverheadConsole ..............................
Garage Door Opener Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Sunglasses Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
2-12
Switchbank ..................................
5-13
Overheated Engine Protection .....................
5-13
Overheating Engine .............................
Owner Checks and Services.......................
7-29
Owner Publications, Ordering .....................
8-12
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................
Park
AutomaticTransaxle ..........................
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
2-30
2-35
2-37
9-7
Parking
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
7-32
Brake Mechanism Check .......................
2-22
Lots .......................................
2-38
Over Things That Burn ........................
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement . . . . . . . 6-16
1-50
Passenger Position ..............................
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Portable Fuel Container. Filling a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Power
Accessory Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 80
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
6-57
OptionFuses ................................
2-65
Remote Control Mirrors ........................
1-3
Seat .........................................
Sliding Door Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Steering .................................... 4-11
Windows ...................................2-5 1
Power Steering Huid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
How to Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
WhattoUse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Whentocheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts ....................
1-49
Problems on the Road ............................
5-1
Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 12
Radiator .....................................
5-21
6-24
Radiator Pressure Cap ...........................
RadioReception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
9-8
3-10
Radios .......................................
Rain. Driving In ................................ 4-18
ReadingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Rear
3-8
AirVents ....................................
CargoLamp .................................
2-64
3-6
Climate Control ...............................
Comfort Controls ..............................
3-7
3-6
FanControl ..................................
1-58
Outside Seat Position ..........................
1-62
Safety Belt Comfort Guides .....................
SeatAudio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Seatpassengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Towing .....................................
5-12
3-5
WindowDefogger .............................
WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Rearview Mirror. Inside Daymight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Recovery Tank. Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Refrigerants. Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Remote Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Remote Operationof the Power Sliding Door......... 2-10
Removing
Bucket Seats .................................
1-28
1-8
Second Row Solid Bench Seat ....................
SplitBenchSeat ..............................
1-20
1-14
Third Row Solid Bench Seat ....................
Replacement
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
6-66
Parts .......................................
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46
Replacing
Bucketseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
1-102
SafetyBelts ................................
Seat and Restraint System Parts After a Crash . . . . . 1-102
Second Row Solid Bench Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
1-22
Split Bench Seat ..............................
1- 16
Third Row Solid Bench Seat ....................
Reporting Safety Defects .........................
8- 10
Resetting the Power Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 19
Restraints
1-101
Checking ..................................
1-82
Child .......................................
1-6
Head ........................................
1.36.2.86
ReminderLight .........................
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102
Second Row Safety Belt Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
7-30
Systemcheck ................................
1.86. 1-87
WheretoPut ...........................
2-31
Reverse .......................................
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
8-5
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roadside Assistance. Canadian .....................
8-7
Rocking YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
6-42
Rotation. Tires .................................
Safety Belt Extender ...........................
1-101
1-35
SafetyBelts ...................................
1-41
Adults ......................................
Care .......................................
6-50
Center Passenger Position (Bench Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Center Passenger Position (Bucket Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1
.....
Extender ...................................
1-101
How to Wear Properly .........................
1-41
1-100
IncorrectUsage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.44.1.99.
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.64.1.66
Lap-Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.41.1.59
LargerChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-98
Passenger Position ............................
1-50
1-40
Questions and Answers ........................
Rear Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Rear Seat Passengers ..........................
1-58
Replacing After a Crash....................... 1.102
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 1-50
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
1-37
WhyTheyWork ..............................
4-37
SafetyChains ..................................
Safety Defects. Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
1.2. 1.6
SeatControls ...............................
Seatback
Folding Driver’s ...............................
1-3
RecliningFront ...............................
1-4
Seats
1-6
Controls .....................................
Driver’s Four-Way Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Dump and Stow Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
LumbarControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Manual Front Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-3
Power .......................................
Rear ........................................
1-6
.
Seats (Continued)
Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. 1.6
Second Row Safety Belt Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
SecondGear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Second Row Solid Bench Seat ......................
1-8
Folding the Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Removing .................................... 1-8
Replacing ...................................1-10
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91, 1-93
Rear Outside Seat Position ......................
1-89
Right Front Seat Position .......................
1-95
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Bulletins, Ordering ............................8- 12
Engine Soon Light ............................
2-93
Manuals, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 12
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Publications, Ordering .........................
8- 12
Work, Doing Your Own .........................6-2
Service and Appearance Care ...................... 6-1
Service and Owner Publications ................... 8- 12
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Shifting
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Into PARK (P) ...............................
2-35
Out of PARK (P) .............................
2-37
1-43
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .....................
SideAshtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-78
Side Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
SignalingTurns ................................
2-53
9-10
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68
Sound Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Spare Tire. Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Specifications and Capacities ...................... 6-65
Specifications. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
SplitBenchSeat ................................ 1-18
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks ...............1-18
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Replacing ...................................
1-22
Stains. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Starting Your Engine ............................
2-27
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
In Emergencies ...............................
4-12
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Tips ........................................
4-11
Wheel. Tilt ..................................
2-52
StorageBin ....................................
2-70
Storage Compartments ........................... 2-66
Frontseat ...................................
2-71
Storage. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire .......................
5-33
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
SunVisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Supplemental Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Switchbanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
...
Symbols.Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VIII
Taillamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
TapePlayerCare ...............................
3-30
Temperature Knob. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
2-22
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft-Deterrent Feature. CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
THEFTLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
6-24
Thermostat ....................................
2-32
Third Gear ....................................
1- 13
Third Row Solid Bench Seat ......................
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
1- 13
Folding the Seatback ..........................
1-14
Removing ...................................
1- 16
Replacing ...................................
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Time. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Tirechains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Tire Loading ...................................
4-30
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Alignment and Balance ........................
6-46
BuyingNew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6-47
Chains .....................................
5-24
ChangingaFlat ..............................
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
Compact Spare ...............................
5-34
6-41
Inflation ....................................
Inflation Check ...............................
7-29
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
4-30
Loading ....................................
6-41
Pressure ....................................
5-33
Storing a Flat or Spare .........................
TemDerature .................................
6-45
Traciion ....................................
6-45
Treadwe ar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6-44
Uniform Quality Grading .......................
6-47
Used Wheel Replacement ......................
6-43
Wear Indicators ..............................
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
When It’s Time for New ....................... 6-43
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
5-32, 6-65
Torque, Wheel Nut .........................
4-33
Towing a Trailer ................................
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Traction Control System Warning Light . . . . . . . . 2-90, 4-10
Trailer
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-40
Driving on Grades ............................
4-37
Drivingwith .................................
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-41
Maintenance When Towing .....................
ParkingonHills .............................. 4-40
Safety Chains ................................ 4-37
4-35
Tongue Weight ...............................
4-36
Total Weight on Tires ..........................
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Turnsignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Transaxle Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Transmitters, Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Transportation,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 100
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-85
TTYUsers .....................................
8-4
Turn Signal
and
Lane
Change
Signals
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-53
.
.
1
9-11
_.
.
Turn Signal Reminder Chime ..................... 2-54
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Underbody Flushing Service ..................... 7-32
UnderbodyMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Underhood Fuse and Relay Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Underhood Lamp ............................... 6-11
Vehicle
4-6
Control ......................................
DamageWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
6-66
Dimensions .................................
IdentificationNumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Loading .................................... 4-30
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
VentilationTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Visor Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Visors. Sun .................................... 2-78
w a r n i n g Devices ............................... 5-2
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................
6-25
Washing Your Vehicle ...........................
6-52
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51
Wheel
Alignment .................................. 6-46
Nut Torque ............................. 5.32. 6.65
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46
Used Replacement ............................ 6-47
Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Windows .....................................
2-50
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
.
Power Rear Quarter ...........................
2-52
Rear Side Panels ..............................2-52
SideLatches .................................2-51
WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55. 6-25
Fluid Level Check ............................
7-29
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
WindshieldWiper .............................. 2-54
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
BladeReplacement ........................... 6-39
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Wiper Blade Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Wiring.Headlamp ..............................6-57
Wrench. Wheel ................................. 5-27
9-12
.
.
.
..
.: :.
... a:., ..
:/
. .,:.
'
.... '
.,
.
m
CAPACITIES An
. = :
LOO lb
1/--pages
Пожаловаться на содержимое документа